530258

BMW 1 Serie - 2008 - 128i Convertible Handleiding

21
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/264
Pagina verder
The Ultimate
Driving Machine
Owner's Manual
for Vehicle
Contents
A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
128i
135i
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.
Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with
enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore
have this request:
Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize
yourself with the information that we have compiled for you
before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data
and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use
and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical fea-
tures. The manual also contains information on maintenance
designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to main-
taining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service
life.
This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.
BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
© 2008 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the
written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
Order No. 01 41 0 014 954
US English II/08, 08 03 500
Printed in Germany
Printed on environmentally friendly paper,
bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic-
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 244.
Using this Owner's Manual
4 Notes
6 Reporting safety defects
At a glance
10 Cockpit
16 iDrive
23 Voice command system
Controls
28 Opening and closing
45 Adjustments
55 Transporting children safely
58 Driving
67 Everything under control
81 Technology for driving comfort and
safety
92 Lamps
97 Climate
103 Practical interior accessories
Driving tips
114 Things to remember when driving
Navigation
122 Starting the navigation system
123 Destination entry
136 Destination guidance
146 What to do if …
Entertainment
150 On/off and settings
154 Radio
160 Satellite radio
163 CD player and CD changer
169 AUX-In port
170 USB-audio interface
Communications
176 Telephoning
191 BMW Assist
Mobility
202 Refueling
204 Wheels and tires
212 Under the hood
217 Maintenance
219 Care
223 Replacing components
229 Giving and receiving assistance
Reference
236 Technical data
240 Short commands for the voice command
system
244 Everything from A-Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Notes
4
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
We have tried to make all the information in this
Owner's Manual easy to find. The fastest way to
find specific topics is to refer to the detailed
index at the back of the manual. If you wish to
gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will
find this in the first chapter.
Should you sell your BMW some day, please
remember to hand over the Owner's Manual as
well; it is an important component of your vehi-
cle.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any other questions, your
BMW center will be glad to advise you at any
time.
Information on BMW, e.g. on technical aspects,
can also be found on the Internet at
www.bmwusa.com.
Symbols used
Indicates precautions that must be fol-
lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-
sibility of personal injury and serious damage to
the vehicle.
Indicates information that will assist you
in gaining the optimum benefit from your
vehicle and enable you to care more effectively
for your vehicle.
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
< Marks the end of a specific item of informa-
tion.
*
Indicates special equipment, country-spe-
cific equipment and optional extras, as well as
equipment and functions not yet available at the
time of printing.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice
command system.
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the
voice command system.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the rel-
evant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
5
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The individual vehicle
When you ordered your BMW, you chose vari-
ous items of equipment. This Owner's Manual
describes the entire array of options and equip-
ment available with a specific BMW model.
Please bear in mind that the manual may con-
tain information on accessories and equipment
that you have not specified for your own vehicle.
Sections describing options and special equip-
ment are marked by asterisks
*
to assist you in
identifying possible differences between the
descriptions in this manual and your own vehi-
cle's equipment.
If equipment in your BMW is not described in
this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accom-
panying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.
Editorial notice
BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing
development that is conceived to ensure that
our vehicles continue to embody the highest
quality and safety standards combined with
advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this
reason, it is possible in exceptional cases that
features described in this Owner's Manual
could differ from those on your vehicle.
For your own safety
Maintenance and repair
Advanced technology, e.g. the use of
modern materials and powerful electron-
ics, requires specially adapted maintenance
and repair methods. You should therefore have
the corresponding work on your vehicle per-
formed only by your BMW center or at a work-
shop that works according to BMW repair pro-
cedures with correspondingly trained
personnel. If this work is not carried out prop-
erly, there is a danger of subsequent damage
and related safety hazards.<
Parts and accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts
and accessories approved by BMW.
When you purchase accessories tested and
approved by BMW and Original BMW Parts, you
simultaneously acquire the assurance that they
have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure
optimum performance when installed on your
vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from
defects in material and workmanship.
BMW will not accept any liability for damage
resulting from installation of parts and accesso-
ries not approved by BMW.
BMW cannot test every product made by other
manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a
BMW safely and without risk to either the vehi-
cle, its operation, or its occupants.
Original BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and
other products approved by BMW, together
with professional advice on using these items,
are available from all BMW centers.
Installation and operation of non-BMW
approved accessories such as alarms, radios,
amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension
components, brake dust shields, telephones,
including operation of any mobile phone from
within the vehicle without using an externally
mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for
instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radio or sim-
ilar accessories, may cause extensive damage
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Notes
6
to the vehicle, compromise its safety, interfere
with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the
validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See your
BMW center for additional information.<
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
the emission control devices and sys-
tems may be performed by any automotive
repair establishment or individual using any cer-
tified automotive part.<
California Proposition 65 warning
California law requires us to issue the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of
automobile components and parts,
including components found in the interior fur-
nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects and reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
your hands after handling.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always
protect your skin by washing thoroughly with
soap and water.<
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly.
Your BMW is covered by the following warran-
ties:
> New Vehicle Limited Warranty
> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
> California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration,
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-
1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of
North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
7
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call
1-800-333-0510 toll-free from anywhere in
Canada or 1-613-993-9851 from the Ottawa
region and from other countries, or contact
Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Can-
ada, ASFAD, Place de Ville, Tower C,
330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
At a glance
This overview of buttons, switches and displays
is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's
operating environment. The section will also
assist you in becoming acquainted with the
control concepts and options available for
operating the various systems.
At a glance
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Cockpit
10
Cockpit
Around the steering wheel: controls and displays
1 Convertible: opening and closing
windows jointly 38
2 Convertible: opening and closing
rear windows 38
3 Opening and closing front
windows 38
4 Folding exterior mirrors in and out
*
51
5 Adjusting exterior mirrors, automatic curb
monitor
*
51
6
Parking lamps 92
Low beams 93
Automatic headlamp control
*
92
Adaptive Head Light
*
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
At a glance
11
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
7
Fog lamps
*
95
8
Turn signals 62
High beams, headlamp flasher 94
Roadside parking lamps
*
94
Computer 68
Settings and information about the
vehicle 71
Settings and information about the
vehicle 71
Instrument lighting 95
9 Instrument cluster 12
10
Windshield wipers 63
Rain sensor
*
63
11 Switching the ignition on/off and
starting/stopping the engine 58
12 Ignition lock 58
13 Buttons on the steering wheel
Telephone
*
:
> Press: accepting and ending a
call; starting dialing
*
of
selected phone number; redi-
aling if no phone number is
selected.
> Press longer: redialing
Volume
Activating/deactivating voice com-
mand system
*
Changing radio station
Selecting music track
Scrolling through phone book and
lists with stored phone numbers
Individually programmable 53
Individually programmable 53
14 Horn: the entire surface
15 Adjusting the steering wheel 53
16
Cruise control
*
65
17 Releasing the hood 212
18 Opening the luggage compartment lid 33
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Cockpit
12
Instrument cluster
1 Speedometer
135i: with fuel gauge
2 Indicator lamps for turn signals
3 Indicator and warning lamps 13
4 Tachometer 67
5 Fuel gauge 68
135i: engine oil temperature 68
6 Display for
> Clock 67
> Outside temperature 67
> Indicator and warning lamps 77
7 Display for
> Position of automatic transmission
*
60
> Computer 68
> Date of next scheduled service, and
remaining distance to be driven 72
> Odometer and trip odometer 67
> Checking oil level 213
> Settings and information 71
8 Resetting the trip odometer 67
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
At a glance
13
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Indicator and warning lamps
The concept
Indicator and warning lamps in the display area
can light up in a variety of combinations and col-
ors.
Some lamps are checked for proper functioning
and thus come on briefly when the engine is
started or the ignition is switched on.
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the lower edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed
indicator and warning lamps.
You can call up more information, e.g. on the
cause of a malfunction and on how to respond,
via Check Control, refer to page 77.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
Indicator lamps without text messages
The following indicator lamps notify you that
certain functions are active:
High beams/headlamp flasher 94
Fog lamps
*
95
Lamp flashes:
DSC or DTC is regulating the propul-
sive forces in order to maintain driving
stability 83
Canada: parking brake applied 59
Parking brake applied 59
Canada: engine malfunction with
adverse effect on exhaust
emissions 218
Engine malfunction with adverse
effect on exhaust emissions 218
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Cockpit
14
Around the center console: controls and displays
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
At a glance
15
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1 Coupe: microphone for voice command
system
*
and for telephone in hands-free
mode
*
Convertible: microphone on steering col-
umn
2 SOS: initiating an Emergency Request
call
*
229
3 Reading lamps
*
96
4 Coupe: glass roof, electric
*
39
5 Interior lamps 95
6 Passenger airbag status lamp 90
7 Control Display 16
8 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 83
9 Hazard warning flashers
10 Central locking system 32
11 Automatic climate control
12 Ejecting audio CD 150
13 Changing
> Radio station 150
> Track 150
14 Selecting radio, CD and CD changer
15 Selecting AM or FM waveband
16 Ejecting navigation DVD
18 Controller 16
Can be turned, pressed, or moved horizon-
tally in four directions
19 Opening start menu on Control Display 17
20 Drive for navigation DVD
*
122
21 Programmable memory keys 21
22 Switching entertainment audio sources on/
off and adjusting volume 150
23 Drive for audio CD 163
Air distribution to the
windshield 98
Air distribution to the upper body
area 98
Air distribution to the footwell 98
Automatic air distribution and flow
rate 99
Cooling function 100
Automatic recirculated-air control
AUC 99
Recirculated-air mode 99
Maximum cooling 98
Residual heat mode 100
Air flow rate 99
Defrosting windows 100
Rear window defroster 100
17
Heated seats
*
49
Convertible: opening the convert-
ible top 41
Convertible: closing the convertible
top 41
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
iDrive
16
iDrive
iDrive integrates the functions of a large num-
ber of switches. This allows these functions to
be operated from a single central position. The
following section provides an introduction to
basic menu navigation. The control of the indi-
vidual functions is described in connection with
the relevant equipment.
Controls
1 Control Display
2 button
Opening start menu
3 Controller
The controller can be used to select menu
items and to adjust settings:
> Move in four directions, arrow 4
> Turn, arrow 5
> Push, arrow 6
Operate the controller only when traffic
and road conditions allow this, to avoid
endangering the car's occupants and other
road users by being distracted.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
At a glance
17
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Menu overview
Communication
> Telephone
*
> BMW Assist
*
or BMW TeleServices
*
Navigation
> Navigation system
> Onboard information, e.g. for displaying the
average fuel consumption
Entertainment
> Radio
> CD player and CD changer
*
> AUX-In port, USB-audio interface
*
for
external audio device
Climate
> Vent settings
> Automatic programs
> Parked car operation
menu
> Closing the screen
> Tone and display settings
> Traffic information settings
> Settings for your vehicle, e.g. for the central
locking system
> Display of service requirements and dates
for statutory inspections
> Settings for telephone
Operating principle
As of radio readiness, the following message
appears on the Control Display:
To hide the message:
Press the controller.
The start menu is displayed.
The message is automatically hidden after
approx. 10 seconds.
Start menu
All iDrive functions can be called up via five
menu items.
Opening start menu
Press the button.
To open the start menu from the menu:
Press the button twice.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
iDrive
18
Calling up menu items in the start menu
As of radio readiness, refer to page 58:
Via the start menu you can call up the four menu
items of Communication, Navigation, Entertain-
ment and Climate by moving the controller for-
wards, backwards, to the left or to the right.
You can call up the menu by pressing the con-
troller.
Convenient call-up of menu items
The convenient call-up function enables you to:
> Call up a menu item from the start menu in
the view last displayed.
> Switch directly between Communication,
Navigation, Entertainment and Climate
without having to press the button.
To do so, move the controller in the corre-
sponding direction and hold it for more than
approx. 2 seconds.
Displays in menu
1 Each menu is subdivided into fields. The
active field is highlighted.
2 A symbol indicates the start menu item last
selected.
1 Menu items are usually grouped in horizon-
tal or vertical lists.
2 In these lists, arrows indicate the possibility
of accessing other menu items that are not
currently visible.
3 Settings are represented graphically or as
numerical values.
Communication
Navigation or onboard information
Entertainment
Climate
menu
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
At a glance
19
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Operating principle at a glance
The following is a general description of opera-
tions using iDrive. For an exemplary step-by-
step application, refer to page 75.
1 Selecting a menu item:
> Turn the controller; the highlight marker
moves
> Menu items in white can be selected by
highlighting them
2 Activating a menu item:
> Press the controller
> New menu items are displayed or the
function is executed
3 Selecting a menu item: refer to 1
4 Switching between fields:
> Briefly move the controller to the left,
right, forward, or backward
> Release the controller
> The active field is brighter in color
5 Adjusting settings:
> Turn the controller
> Graphic display, numerical value or text
displays can be changed
> Confirm by changing the field
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
iDrive
20
Status information
1 Display for:
> Entertainment:
Radio, CD or
> Telephone
*
in "Communication":
Name of the connected mobile phone,
network search or no network
> "BMW Assist"
*
:
Active voice connection with a
BMW Assist service
2 Entertainment audio output off
3 Display for traffic information
*
:
"TI":
Traffic information for the navigation sys-
tem can be received and transmission is
switched on
4 Display for:
> New entries present in "Missed calls"
*
> Roaming active
5 It is possible to make calls
*
if the mobile
phone is paired with the vehicle
Reception strength of mobile phone
network, display depending on mobile
phone
6 Time
Other displays:
Status information is temporarily hidden during
Check Control message displays or entries via
the voice command system
*
.
Closing/opening the screen
Do not place objects in the vicinity of the
open screen, otherwise the screen may
be damaged.<
Closing the screen
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Close display" and press the con-
troller.
You can also close the screen manually.<
Opening the screen
Press the controller.
Setting the conditions for opening the
screen automatically
You can select the events that cause the screen
to open automatically.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Display settings" and press the
controller.
5. Select "Display" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
At a glance
21
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The various conditions are shown on the
Control Display.
6. Select the desired conditions and press the
controller:
> When there is an incoming call:
"Call"
> When an important Check Control mes-
sage is displayed:
"Check Control message"
> When there is a navigation system mes-
sage:
"Navigation info"
> When the voice command system is
started:
"Speech input"
> When the ignition is switched on:
"Ignition on"
> When the Park Distance Control is dis-
played:
"PDC Display on"
The condition is selected.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Programmable memory keys
Using the programmable memory keys, you can
store and execute certain iDrive functions:
> Navigation
*
destinations
> Entertainment:
> Radio stations
> CD
> CD compartment of CD changer
> AUX
> Telephone: phone numbers
The assignment of the programmable memory
keys is stored for the remote control currently in
use.
Storing functions
Navigation* destinations
1. Select the navigation destination, e.g. in the
destination list or address book.
2. ... Press the key longer than
2seconds.
Special features of the Professional navigation
system:
> If destination guidance and the map view
have been started, the current destination is
stored.
> If the destination is entered via map, the
coordinates in the cross-hairs are stored,
not the current destination.
Telephone, phone numbers
1. Enter the phone number or select the num-
ber from a list of stored phone numbers, e.g.
the A-Z list.
2. ... Press the key longer than
2seconds.
If the phone number is associated with a name,
the name is also stored.
Entertainment
The item stored in the Entertainment menu is
the source that is playing at the time of storage,
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
iDrive
22
e.g. a radio station, irrespective of what was
selected on the Control Display.
1. Select the desired function, e.g. radio sta-
tion or CD.
2. ... Press the key longer than
2seconds.
If the car is equipped with two drives and a
CD with compressed audio files is played,
the current track is stored.<
Executing a function
... Press the key.
The function is executed immediately. This
means that, for example, if a phone number is
selected, the connection is established, or if a
navigation destination is called up, destination
guidance is started.
Displaying memory key assignments
You can have the assignment of a memory key
displayed by touching the key with your finger.
Please do not wear gloves when doing so.
Touching the keys with an object such as a pen
will not work.
Displaying brief information
... Touch the key.
The key assignment is displayed.
Navigation destination
Entertainment source
Telephone, phone number
Not assigned
Displaying detailed information
... Touch the key for a longer
period.
Clearing key assignments
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Select "Programmable Memory Keys" and
press the controller.
6. Select "Delete assignment of all memory
keys" and press the controller.
7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
At a glance
23
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Voice command system
The concept
The voice command system allows you to con-
trol operation of various vehicle systems with-
out removing your hands from the steering
wheel.
Individual menu items on the Control Display
can be spoken as commands. It is not neces-
sary to use the controller.
The voice command system transforms your
oral commands into control signals for the
selected systems and provides support in the
form of instructions or questions.
The voice command system uses a special
microphone located in the area of the interior
rearview mirror, refer to page 14.
Precondition
Via iDrive, select the language in which the
voice command system is operating, so that the
spoken commands can be identified. Selecting
the language for iDrive, refer to page 80.
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Saying commands
Activating voice command system
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
This symbol on the Control Display and a sig-
nal indicate that the voice command system is
ready to receive spoken commands.
2. Say the command.
Text or digits that are understood by the
voice command system are displayed on
the Control Display.
This symbol appears on the Control Display
when you can enter additional commands.
*
{...} Say the specified commands word for
word.
{{...}} Indicates responses of the voice
command system.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Voice command system
24
If no further commands are possible, continue
by operating the item of equipment via iDrive.
Terminating or canceling voice
command system
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
Commands
Having the possible commands read
aloud
You can have the system read aloud the possi-
ble commands related to the selected menu
item on the Control Display.
To have the possible commands read out to
you:
For instance, if you have selected "CD", the
commands available for operating the CD
player and CD changer
*
are read out.
Opening help
Using alternative commands
There are often a number of commands to run a
function, e.g.:
Calling up functions immediately via
short commands
Short commands enable you to perform certain
functions immediately, irrespective of which
menu item is selected, refer to page 240.
Opening the start menu
Example: selecting a track
1. If necessary, switch on entertainment audio
output.
2. Press the button on the steering wheel.
{Cancel}
{Options}
{Help}
{Radio on} or {Turn radio on}
{Main menu}
3. {Entertainment}.
The system says:
{{Entertainment}}.
4. {CD}.
The system says:
{{CD on}}.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
At a glance
25
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
5. Press the button on the steering wheel.
Notes
For information on voice control of the
telephone, refer also to the separate
Owner's Manual.<
For voice commands, bear in mind the follow-
ing:
> Pronounce the commands and digits
smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding
excessive emphases and pauses. The same
applies to spelling when entering a destina-
tion for navigation.
> Always speak the commands in the lan-
guage of the voice command system.
> When selecting a radio station, use the
standard pronunciation of the station name.
> For entries in the voice-activated phone
book, only use names in the language of the
voice command system and no abbrevia-
tions.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass roof
closed to prevent interference from outside
noise.
> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
6. Select a track, e.g.:
{Track 1}.
The system says:
{{Track 1}}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information for complete control of your vehicle.
All features and accessories that are useful for
driving and your safety, comfort and
convenience, are described here.
Controls
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
28
Opening and closing
Remote control
Each remote control contains a rechargeable
battery that is automatically recharged when it
is in the ignition lock while the car is being
driven. Use each remote control at least twice a
year for longer road trips in order to maintain the
batteries' charge status. In cars with convenient
access
*
, the remote control contains a replace-
able battery, refer to page 37.
The settings called up and implemented when
the car is unlocked depend on which remote
control is used to unlock the car, refer to Per-
sonal Profile below.
In addition, information about service require-
ments is stored in the remote control, refer to
Service data in the remote control, page 217.
Integrated key
Press button 1 to release the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
> Driver's door, refer to page 32
> Convertible: glove compartment, refer to
page 106
> Luggage compartment lid, refer to page 33
New remote controls
Your BMW center can supply new remote con-
trols with integrated keys as additional units or
as replacements in the event of loss.
Personal Profile
The concept
You can set many of your BMW's functions to
suit your personal needs and preferences.
Without any action on your part, Personal Pro-
file ensures that most of these settings are
stored for the remote control currently in use.
When you unlock the car, the remote control
used for the purpose is recognized and the set-
tings stored for it are called up and imple-
mented.
This means that your personal settings will be
activated for you, even if in the meantime your
car was used by someone else with another
remote control and the corresponding settings.
The individual settings are stored for a maxi-
mum of four remote controls. They are stored
for two remote controls if convenient access
*
is
in use.
Personal Profile settings
For more information on specific settings, refer
to the specified pages.
> Assignment of programmable memory
keys, refer to page 21
> Response of the central locking system
when the car is unlocked, refer to page 29
> Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to
page 32
> Automatic call-up
*
of the driver's seat posi-
tion after unlocking, refer to page 49
> Programming buttons
*
on the steering
wheel, refer to page 53
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
29
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
> Triple turn signal activation, refer to
page 63
> Settings for the display on the Control Dis-
play and in the instrument cluster:
> 12h/24h format of the clock, refer to
page 76
> Date format, refer to page 77
> Brightness of Control Display, refer to
page 80
> Language of Control Display, refer to
page 80
> Units of measure for fuel consumption,
distance covered/remaining distances,
and temperature, refer to page 71
> Show visual warning for Park Distance Con-
trol PDC, refer to page 81
> Light settings:
> Welcome lamps, refer to page 92
> Pathway lighting, refer to page 93
> Daytime running lamps, refer to page 93
> Automatic climate control: AUTO program,
cooling function and automatic recircu-
lated-air control activation/deactivation,
temperature, air flow rate and distribution,
refer to page 98
> Entertainment:
> Audio volume, refer to page 151
> Tone control, refer to page 151
> Speed-dependent volume control, refer
to page 151
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system functions when the
driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and
releases the locks on the following:
> Doors
> Luggage compartment lid
> Fuel filler door
Operating from outside
> Via the remote control
> Via the door lock
> In cars with convenient access
*
, via the
handles on the driver's and front passen-
ger's doors
The anti-theft system is also operated at the
same time. It prevents the doors from being
unlocked using the lock buttons or door han-
dles. In addition, if the remote control is used,
the welcome lamps
*
, interior lamps and the
door's courtesy lamps
*
are switched on or off.
The alarm system
*
is also armed or disarmed.
For further details on the alarm system
*
, refer
to page 34.
Operating from inside
By means of the button for central locking, refer
to page 32.
In the event of a sufficiently severe accident, the
central locking system unlocks automatically. In
addition, the hazard warning flashers and inte-
rior lamps come on.
Opening and closing:
Using the remote control
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle
could lock the doors from the inside. You
should therefore take the remote control with
you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter
can be opened from outside.<
Unlocking
Press the button.
The interior lamps, the courtesy lamps
*
and the
welcome lamps come on.
Setting unlocking characteristics
You can set whether only the driver's door or
the entire vehicle is to be unlocked when the
button is pressed for the first time.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
30
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Door locks" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Central locking" and press the con-
troller.
7. Select "Unlock button" and press the con-
troller.
8. Select a menu item:
> "All doors"
Press the button once to unlock the
entire vehicle.
> "Driver's door only"
Press the button once to unlock only
the driver's door and the fuel filler door.
Press the button twice to unlock the
entire vehicle.
9. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Coupe: convenient opening
Hold the button down.
The windows and the glass roof
*
are opened.
Convertible: convenient opening*
You can open the convertible top using the
remote control for convenient access within a
range of approx. 13 ft/4 m from the vehicle.
Hold the button down.
The windows and the convertible top are
opened provided that the doors are closed.
If you continue pressing the button, the win-
dows move up.
Watch during the opening process to
ensure that no one is injured. Releasing
the button interrupts the opening process.<
Locking
Press the button.
Convertible: convenient closing*
You can close the convertible top and the win-
dows using the remote control for convenient
access within a range of approx. 13 ft/4 m from
the vehicle.
Hold the button down.
The convertible top and the windows are
closed.
Watch during the closing process to
ensure that no one is injured. Releasing
the button interrupts the closing process.<
Switching on interior lamps
While the car is locked:
Press the button.
You can also use this function to locate your
vehicle in parking garages etc.
Unlocking the luggage compartment
lid
Press the button for a longer period.
The luggage compartment lid opens a short
distance, regardless of whether it was locked or
unlocked.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
31
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The luggage compartment lid swings
backward and up when opened. Ensure
that there is sufficient clearance.
To avoid locking yourself out by accident, do
not place the remote control in the cargo bay.
A previously locked luggage compartment lid is
locked again after closing.
Before and after each trip, check that the lug-
gage compartment lid has not been inadvert-
ently unlocked.<
Confirmation signals
You can activate or deactivate the confirmation
signals.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Door locks" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Confirmation" and press the con-
troller.
7. Select the desired signal
*
.
8. Press the controller.
The signals are switched on.
Malfunctions
The remote control may malfunction due to
local radio waves. If this occurs, unlock and lock
the car at the door lock with the integrated key.
In vehicles without an alarm system
*
or conve-
nient access
*
, only the driver's door can be
unlocked and locked using the integrated key in
the door lock.
When the driver's and front passenger's doors
are closed, you can lock and unlock both doors,
the luggage compartment lid and the fuel filler
door using the button for the central locking
system in the interior, refer to page 32.
If the car can no longer be locked with a remote
control, the battery in the remote control is dis-
charged. Use the remote control on an
extended trip to recharge the battery, refer to
page 28. The remote control for convenient
access contains a battery that may have to be
changed, refer to page 37.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communications
Commission regulations. Operation is gov-
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
> This device must not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
> this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or
changes to these devices could void the
user's authority to operate this equipment.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
32
Opening and closing:
Using the door lock
You can set the way in which the car is
unlocked, refer to page 29.
If the vehicle is not equipped with an
alarm system
*
or convenient access
*
,
only the driver's door is locked via the door
lock.<
To lock both doors, the fuel filler door and the
luggage compartment lid together:
1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle
using the button for the central locking sys-
tem in the interior, refer to page 32.
2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas-
senger's door, refer to page 33.
3. Lock the vehicle.
> Lock the driver's door using the inte-
grated key in the door lock, or
> press down the lock button of the front
passenger's door and close the door
from the outside.
Convenient operation*
If the car is equipped with an alarm system
*
or
convenient access
*
, you can also control the
power windows and the glass roof
*
in the
coupe or the convertible top in the convertible
via the door lock.
Hold the key in the position for unlocking or
locking.
During each closing procedure, and when
opening the convertible top, watch the
process and ensure that no one becomes
trapped. Releasing the key stops the opera-
tion.<
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
lock and unlock the driver's door by turning the
integrated key to the corresponding limit posi-
tions in the door lock.
Opening and closing:
From inside
This button serves to unlock or lock doors and
the luggage compartment lid, but does not acti-
vate the anti-theft system. The fuel filler door
remains unlocked.
Automatic locking
You can also set the situations in which the car
locks:
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Door locks" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Central locking" and press the con-
troller.
7. Select a menu item:
> "Relock door if not opened"
The central locking system automati-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
33
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
cally locks the vehicle after some time if
no door has been opened.
> "Lock after driving"
The central locking system automati-
cally locks the vehicle as soon as you
drive off.
8. Press the controller.
The setting is selected.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Unlocking and opening doors
> Either unlock the doors together using the
button for the central locking system and
then pull the door handle above the armrest
or
> pull on the door handle of each door twice:
the first time unlocks the door, the second
time opens it.
Locking
> Use the central locking button to lock all of
the doors simultaneously, or
> press down the safety lock button of a door.
To prevent you from being locked out, the
open driver's door cannot be locked using
the lock button.
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle
could lock the doors from the inside. You
should therefore take the remote control with
you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter
can be opened from outside.<
Luggage compartment lid
In order to avoid damage, make sure there
is sufficient clearance before opening the
luggage compartment lid.<
Opening from inside
Press the button: the luggage compartment lid
opens unless it has been locked.
Opening from outside
Press the button, see arrow, or the button on
the remote control for a longer period. The lug-
gage compartment lid opens slightly and can be
swung upward.
Opening manually
The integrated key of the remote control, refer
to page 28, fits the luggage compartment lid
lock.
If you open the luggage compartment lid
using the key while the alarm system is
armed, the alarm will be triggered. Switching off
an alarm, refer to page 35.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
34
Turn the key all the way to the left: the luggage
compartment lid opens.
Locking or unlocking separately
The switch is located in the glove compartment.
1 Locking the luggage compartment lid
2 Unlocking the luggage compartment lid
Locking separately
Push the switch in the direction of arrow 1.
The luggage compartment lid is locked and
cannot be unlocked using the central locking
system.
If you give the remote control without the inte-
grated key to someone else while the glove
compartment is locked, the luggage compart-
ment lid cannot be opened. This is an advan-
tage when using valet parking, for example.
Locking the glove compartment, refer to
page 106.
Unlocking separately
Push the switch in the direction of arrow 2.
Emergency release
Pull the lever in the cargo bay. The luggage
compartment lid is unlocked.
Closing
The handle recesses on the interior trim of the
luggage compartment lid make it easier to pull
down.
Make sure that the closing path of the
luggage compartment lid is clear, other-
wise injuries may result.<
Alarm system*
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds:
> When a door, the hood or the luggage com-
partment lid is opened
> To movements inside the vehicle: interior
motion sensor, refer to page 35
> When the car's inclination changes, for
instance if an attempt is made to jack it up
and steal the wheels or to raise it prior to
towing away: tilt alarm sensor, refer to
page 35
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
35
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
> When there is an interruption in the power
supply from the battery.
Depending on the national-market version, the
alarm system briefly signals unauthorized entry
attempts by:
> An acoustic alarm
> Switching on
*
the hazard warning flashers
Arming and disarming
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm
system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
You can open the luggage compartment lid
using the button of the remote control even
if the alarm system is armed, refer to page 30.
The lid is locked and monitored again as soon
as it is closed.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button for at least three seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Switching off an alarm
> Unlock the car with the remote control, refer
to page 29, or
> insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
Indicator lamp displays
> The indicator lamp under the inside rear-
view mirror flashes continuously: the sys-
tem is armed.
> The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
doors, hood or luggage compartment lid are
not properly closed. Even if you do not
close the alerted area, the system begins to
monitor the remaining areas, and the indi-
cator lamp flashes continuously after
approx. 10 seconds. The interior motion
sensor and the tilt alarm sensor are not acti-
vated.
> The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:
your vehicle has not been disturbed while
you were away.
> If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the remote control is inserted in the
ignition, but for no longer than approx.
5 minutes: your vehicle has been disturbed
while you were away.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm
system reacts, e.g. to attempts to steal a wheel
or tow the vehicle.
Interior motion sensor
Coupe
In order for the interior motion sensor to func-
tion properly, the windows and glass roof must
be completely closed
*
.
Convertible
The interior of the car is monitored up to the
height of the seat cushions. Thus the alarm sys-
tem is activated together with the interior
motion sensor even if the convertible top is
open. The alarm can be triggered unintention-
ally by falling objects such as leaves, refer to
Avoiding unintentional alarms.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
may be switched off at the same time. This pre-
vents unintentional alarms, e.g. in the following
situations:
> In duplex garages
> During transport on car-carrying trains,
boats/ships or on a trailer
> When animals are to remain in the vehicle
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
36
Switching off tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the button on the remote control
again as soon as the vehicle is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then
flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and
the interior motion sensor are switched off until
the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subse-
quently locked again.
Convenient access*
Convenient access enables you to enter your
vehicle without needing to hold the remote con-
trol in your hand. All you need to do is wear the
remote control close to your body, e.g. in your
jacket pocket. The vehicle detects the corre-
sponding remote control within the immediate
vicinity or in the passenger compartment.
Convenient access supports the following
functions:
> Unlocking/locking the vehicle
> Unlocking the luggage compartment lid
separately
> Engine starting
> Convenient closure
Functional requirement
> The vehicle or the luggage compartment lid
can only be locked when the vehicle detects
that the remote control currently in use is
outside of the vehicle.
> The vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked
again until after approx. 2 seconds.
> The engine can only be started when the
vehicle detects that the remote control cur-
rently in use is inside the vehicle.
Comparison to the standard remote
control
In general, there is no difference between using
convenient access or pressing the buttons on
the remote control to carry out the functions
mentioned above. You should therefore first
familiarize yourself with the instructions on
opening and closing starting on page 28.
Special features regarding the use of conve-
nient access are described below.
If you notice a brief delay while opening or
closing windows, the glass roof or the
convertible top, the system is checking whether
a remote control is inside the vehicle. Please
repeat the opening or closing procedure, if nec-
essary.<
Unlocking
Grasp the handle on the driver's or front pas-
senger's door completely, arrow 1. This corre-
sponds to pressing the button.
Locking
Touch the surface, arrow 2, with your finger for
approx. 1 second. This corresponds to pressing
the button.
To preserve the battery, please make
sure that the ignition and all electrical
consumers are switched off before locking the
vehicle.<
Coupe: convenient closure
For convenient closure, keep your finger on the
surface, arrow 2.
Convertible: window and convertible
top operation
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond,
you can open and close the windows and the
convertible top when a remote control is
located inside the vehicle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
37
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Unlocking the luggage compartment
lid separately
Press the button on the outside of the luggage
compartment lid. This corresponds to pressing
the button.
If the vehicle detects that a remote con-
trol has been accidentally left inside the
locked vehicle's interior after the luggage com-
partment lid is closed, the lid will reopen. The
hazard warning flashers flash and a signal
*
sounds.<
Switching on radio readiness
Radio readiness is switched on by pressing the
start/stop button, refer to page 58.
Do not depress the brake or the clutch,
otherwise the engine will start immedi-
ately.<
Starting the engine
You can start the engine or switch on the igni-
tion when a remote control is inside the vehicle.
It is not necessary to insert a remote control into
the ignition switch, refer to page 58.
Switching off the engine in cars with
automatic transmission
The engine can only be switched off when the
selector lever is in position P, refer to page 59.
To switch the engine off when the selector lever
is in position N, the remote control must be in
the ignition switch.
Before driving a vehicle with automatic
transmission into a car wash
1. Insert remote control into ignition switch.
2. Depress the brake.
3. Move the selector lever to position N.
4. Switch off the engine.
The vehicle can roll.
Malfunctions
Convenient access may malfunction due to
local radio waves. If this happens, open and
close the vehicle via the buttons on the remote
control or using the integrated key. To start the
engine afterward, insert the remote control into
the ignition switch.
Warning lamps
The warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when you attempt to
start the engine: the engine cannot
be started. The remote control is not inside the
vehicle or is malfunctioning. Take the remote
control with you inside the vehicle or have it
checked. If necessary, insert another remote
control into the ignition switch.
The warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up while the engine is
running: the remote control is no
longer inside the vehicle. After the engine is
switched off, the engine can only be restarted
within approx. 10 seconds.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on and a message
appears on the Control Display:
replace the battery in the remote control.
Replacing the battery
The remote control for convenient access con-
tains a battery that will need to be replaced from
time to time.
1. Take the integrated key out of the remote
control, refer to page 28.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Insert the new battery with the plus side fac-
ing up.
4. Press the cover on to close.
Take the old battery to a battery collec-
tion point or to your BMW center.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
38
Windows
To prevent injuries, watch the windows
while closing them.
Take the remote control out of the ignition
when you leave the car, otherwise children
could operate the electric windows and possi-
bly injure themselves.<
Coupe: opening, closing
> Press the switch to the resistance point:
The window opens as long as you press the
switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The window opens automatically. Press the
switch again to stop the opening move-
ment.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch.
Convertible: opening, closing
Window operation with convenient access,
refer also to page 30.
To close the side windows while driving,
either close the rear windows first or all
four windows together, otherwise the windows
may not close tightly at high speeds.<
Individually
> Press the switch to the resistance point:
The window opens as long as you press the
switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The window opens automatically. Press the
switch again to stop the opening move-
ment.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch. The rear windows cannot
be closed automatically.
Jointly
> Press the switch to the resistance point:
All windows open as long as you press the
switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
All windows open automatically. Press the
switch again to stop the opening move-
ment.
> Pull the switch:
All windows close as long as you pull the
switch.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
39
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
After switching off the ignition
When the remote control is removed or the igni-
tion is switched off, you can still operate the
windows for approx. 1 minute as long as no
door has been opened.
Convenient operation
For information on convenient operation via the
remote control or the door lock, refer to page 29
or 32. For information on closing with conve-
nient access, refer to Locking on page 36.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
power window closes, the closing action is
interrupted and the window reopens slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system
check and clear the window's travel path
prior to closing it, otherwise the safety system
might fail to detect certain kinds of obstruc-
tions, such as thin objects, and the window
would continue closing.
Do not install any accessories that might inter-
fere with window movement. Otherwise the
pinch protection system could be impaired.
Convertible: the rear windows are not equipped
with pinch protection. Therefore, watch them
closely when closing to avoid personal injury.<
Closing without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, or if ice on the win-
dows, etc., prevents you from closing the win-
dows normally, proceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and
hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and
the window reopens slightly if the closing
force exceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch again past the resistance
point within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there. The window closes without pinch
protection.
Coupe: glass roof*, electric
To prevent injuries, watch the glass roof
while closing it.
Take the remote control with you when you
leave the car, otherwise children could operate
the roof and possibly injure themselves.<
Raising
Press the switch.
> The closed glass roof is raised and the slid-
ing visor opens slightly.
> The open glass roof automatically travels
into the raised position. The sliding visor
remains completely open.
Do not close the sliding visor forcibly with
the roof in the raised position, as this
would damage the mechanism.<
Opening, closing
> Press the switch backwards to the resis-
tance point.
The glass roof and the sliding visor open
together as long as you hold the switch in
this position.
> Press the switch backwards past the resis-
tance point.
The glass roof and the sliding visor open
automatically. Briefly press the switch again
to stop the opening movement.
You can close the glass roof in a similar manner
by pressing the switch forwards. The sliding
visor remains open and can be closed by hand.
For information on convenient operation via the
remote control or the door lock, refer to page 29
or 32. For information on closing with conve-
nient access, refer to Locking on page 36.
After switching off the ignition
When the remote control is removed or the igni-
tion is switched off, you can still operate the roof
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
40
for approx. 1 minute as long as no door has
been opened.
Pinch protection system
If the glass roof encounters an obstruction dur-
ing closing from approximately the middle of
the opening in the roof, or during closing from
the raised position, the closing movement is
interrupted and the glass roof is opened again
slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system
check and clear the roof's travel path prior
to closing it, otherwise the safety system might
fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such
as very thin objects, and the roof would con-
tinue closing.<
Closing without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, press the switch
forward past the resistance point and hold it
there. The roof closes without pinch protection.
Following interruptions in electrical
power supply
After a power failure, there is a possibility that
the glass roof can only be raised. The system
must be initialized. BMW recommends having
this work done by your BMW center.
Closing manually*
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
move the glass roof manually:
1. Unclip the front of the cover of the interior
lamps using the screwdriver from the
onboard tool kit, refer to page 223.
2. On both sides, use the screwdriver to press
on the clip inside the opening.
3. Remove the control unit.
4. Unplug the motor. Considerably less effort
will be required for manual operation.
5. Insert the Allen wrench
*
supplied with the
onboard tool kit, refer to page 223, into the
opening provided. Move the glass roof in
the desired direction.
6. Reattach the lamp cover and reinstall the
control unit.
Convertible: top
The fully automatic top combines reliable
weather protection with simple and convenient
operation.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
41
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The following tips will enhance your driving
pleasure in your convertible:
> It is advisable that you close the convertible
top when you park the vehicle. Not only
does the closed top protect the vehicle inte-
rior against unanticipated weather damage,
it also offers a certain amount of theft pro-
tection. However, even when the top is
closed, valuables should only be stored in
the locked cargo bay.
> Do not attach roof-mounted luggage sys-
tems to the convertible top.
> When opening a wet top, e.g. after driving in
the rain, water may drip into the cargo bay. If
necessary, remove items from the cargo
bay beforehand to avoid water stains or soil-
ing.
At temperatures below +14 7/–106, do
not move the convertible top or damage
may occur.
Do not keep the convertible top in the convert-
ible top box for longer than one day if it is wet,
otherwise the moisture may cause damage.
Do not place objects on the convertible top, as
otherwise they may fall off when you operate
the convertible top and cause damage or injury.
Never move the convertible top when the roll-
over protection system is in the activated posi-
tion.
Always fully complete a convertible top move-
ment. Driving with the convertible top incom-
pletely opened or closed can result in damage
or injury.
Do not reach into the mechanism during the
opening or closing procedure. Keep children
away from the opening/closing path of the con-
vertible top.
For safety reasons, only move the convertible
top when the vehicle is stationary, if possible.<
The convertible top swings upward when
opening and closing. When operating the
convertible top in a garage, under a bridge, etc.,
ensure that there are at least 6 ft 7 in/2 m of
headroom, otherwise the vehicle may be dam-
aged.<
Before opening and closing
> Comply with the safety precautions
described above.
> Ensure that the cargo bay partition is folded
down and engaged on both sides, refer to
page 109, otherwise it will not be possible
to open the convertible top.
> Ensure that the cargo does not press
against the cargo bay partition from below.
> Ensure that the luggage compartment lid is
closed.
Opening and closing
Convertible top operation with convenient
access, refer also to page 30.
As of radio readiness, refer to page 58:
If possible, conserve the battery by only
operating the convertible top when the
engine is running.
Before closing the convertible top, remove all
foreign objects from the windshield frame as
these could prevent the hardtop from closing
properly.<
1 Push button: close convertible top
2 Push button: open convertible top
3 LEDs
The side windows move down slightly
when the buttons for convertible top
operation are pressed.<
Operation while driving
You can open or close the convertible top while
driving, as long as the car is not moving faster
than approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
42
If you accelerate to over 30 mph/50 km/h while
the convertible top is moving, the procedure is
interrupted.
When operating the convertible top while
driving, pay extra attention to the traffic to
avoid an accident. If possible, do not move the
convertible top while driving in reverse gear,
because your view to the rear is severely limited
during the procedure. Do not operate the con-
vertible top while driving in windy conditions.
Do not drive faster than 30 mph/50 km/h, other-
wise damage to the vehicle can occur.<
LEDs
> While the convertible top is being operated,
the left LED lights up green. It goes out as
soon as the top is fully opened or closed.
In the following situations, a message appears
on the Control Display or an acoustic signal
sounds in addition to the LED lighting up:
> If the right-hand LED flashes red when you
release the button, the opening or closing
action has not yet finished.
> If the right-hand LED lights up red when the
button is pressed, the cargo bay partition is
raised, the luggage compartment lid is not
closed or there is a malfunction. The con-
vertible top cannot be moved.
Interruption
The automatic sequence of movements is
interrupted if the button for the convertible top
operation is released. The sequence can be
continued in the desired direction by pushing or
pulling the buttons.
If the opening or closing procedure is inter-
rupted for an extended period, the convertible
top remains in the raised position for approx.
10 minutes and then slowly moves to a stable
position.
A convertible top that is not fully opened
or closed is a safety hazard.<
If the convertible top is not fully opened or
closed, the luggage compartment lid can-
not be opened and the windows cannot be
moved.<
Convenient operation with remote
control or via door lock
Refer to pages 30 and 32.
Closing manually
Only close the convertible top manually if
it is absolutely necessary, and never open
it manually. The convertible top box cover can-
not be locked if there is an electrical defect and
would then open while the vehicle is in motion.
Incorrect handling can result in damage.<
Closing the convertible top manually should be
performed by two people. The rear seats must
not be occupied.
Before closing
1. If possible, close all windows and then lower
the rear windows by approx. 3/4 in/2 cm.
After you manually unlock the convertible
top box cover, the windows can no longer
be operated.
2. Open the luggage compartment lid. If there
is an electrical fault, unlock the lid using the
integrated key, refer to page 33.
3. Take the Allen wrench and screwdriver out
of the onboard tool kit, refer to page 223.
4. Using the screwdriver, loosen the two but-
tons in the cargo bay, arrows 1, and pull
them out forcefully as far as they will go.
The convertible top box cover is unlocked.
5. Close the luggage compartment lid. After
the convertible top box cover is unlocked
manually, the luggage compartment lid can
only be opened using the integrated key.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
43
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Closing
1. Open the doors.
2. Slide the protective cap, arrow 2, forward.
3. Slowly and smoothly open the convertible
top box cover all the way, arrow 3.
4. The locking pins must have engaged com-
pletely. If they are still visible: close the con-
vertible top box cover as far as necessary
until the locking bolts engage audibly, then
slowly open the cover. During this process,
do not close the convertible top box cover
completely.
5. Lift out the front part of the convertible top,
arrows 4, on both sides and swing it for-
ward. At the same time keep the convertible
top box cover from closing, e.g. using your
shoulder.
6. Position the rear convertible top frame
upright, arrow 5, and close the convertible
top box cover, arrow 6. Then lower the rear
convertible top frame.
7. Together with another person, press down
the front convertible top frame from the out-
side and on both sides as far as possible.
8. Carefully remove the cover in the center of
the front convertible top frame using the
screwdriver.
9. Attach the handle of the screwdriver to the
Allen wrench and insert the wrench into the
opening provided.
10. Turn the Allen wrench all the way to the left,
arrow 7, until the front convertible top frame
is locked to the windshield frame. The rear
convertible top frame is automatically
pressed down onto the convertible top box
cover and is sealed tight under tension.
The closing procedure must be fully com-
pleted, otherwise damage or injury may
occur.<
Please contact your BMW center to have the
cause of the malfunction eliminated.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
44
Wind deflector
The wind deflector keeps air currents in the
passenger compartment at a low level when the
convertible top is down and provides for an
even more pleasant journey at higher speeds.
Installation
1. Remove the wind deflector from the protec-
tive cover and unfold it, arrows 1.
2. Press together the top and bottom parts of
the wind deflector until the catch engages,
arrow 2.
3. Position both locking pins of one side at the
openings provided for them.
4. Press the wind deflector into the openings,
arrows 3, overcoming the tension in the
springs, and push the free locking pin in the
same direction, arrow 4.
5. Position the free locking pins at the corre-
sponding openings and let the spring ten-
sion lock the wind deflector in place, arrow
5.
6. Fold up the top section of the wind deflec-
tor, arrow 6.
With the wind deflector installed: do not
recline the front-seat backrests too far if
the seat is to be slid all the way back, as this
would damage the wind deflector.<
Removing the wind deflector
Proceed in the reverse order as used for instal-
lation.
Folding
Slide the red release lever towards the middle of
the wind deflector and push the two halves
apart.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
45
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Adjustments
Sitting safely
The ideal sitting position can make a vital con-
tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In con-
junction with the safety belts, the head
restraints and the airbags, the seated position
has a major influence on your safety in the event
of an accident. To ensure that the safety sys-
tems operate with optimal efficiency, we
strongly urge you to observe the instructions
contained in the following section.
For additional information on transporting chil-
dren safely, refer to page 55.
Airbags
Always maintain an adequate distance
between yourself and the airbags. Always
grip the steering wheel on the rim, with your
hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions,
to minimize the risk of injury to the hands or
arms in the event of the airbag being triggered
off.
No one and nothing is to come between the air-
bags and the seat occupant.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the
front passenger side as a storage area. Make
sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly,
i.e. not resting feet or legs on the dashboard,
otherwise leg injuries can occur if the front air-
bag is triggered.
Make sure that passengers do not lean their
heads against the side or head airbag, other-
wise serious injuries could result if the airbags
suddenly deployed.<
Even if you follow all the instructions, injuries
resulting from contact with airbags cannot be
fully excluded, depending on the circum-
stances. The ignition and inflation noise may
provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensi-
tive individuals. This effect is usually only tem-
porary.
For airbag locations and additional information
on airbags, refer to page 89.
Head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that its center is at approx. ear level. Oth-
erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident.<
Head restraints, refer to page 47.
Safety belt
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants
wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the
safety belt as an additional safety device, but
they do not represent a substitute.
Your vehicle has four seats, each of which is
equipped with a safety belt.
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow
infants or small children to ride in a passenger's
lap. Make sure that the belt in the lap area sits
low across the hips and does not press against
the abdomen.
The safety belt must not rest against the throat,
run across sharp edges, pass over hard or frag-
ile objects or be pinched. Fasten the safety belt
so that it sits as snugly as possible against the
lap and shoulder without being twisted. Other-
wise the belt could slide over your hips and
injure your abdomen in the event of a frontal
collision. Avoid wearing bulky clothing and reg-
ularly pull the belt in the upper-body area taut,
otherwise its restraining effect could be
impaired.<
Safety belts, refer to page 51.
Seats
Note before adjusting
Never attempt to adjust your seat while
the vehicle is moving. The seat could
respond with unexpected movement, and the
ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Adjustments
46
accident.
On the front passenger seat as well, do not
incline the backrest too far to the rear while the
vehicle is being driven, otherwise there is a dan-
ger in the event of an accident of sliding under
the safety belt, eliminating the protection nor-
mally provided by the belt.<
Comply with the instructions on head restraint
height on page 47, and on damaged safety
belts on page 51.
Manual adjustment
Observe the adjustment instructions
above to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
Longitudinal direction
Pull lever 1 and slide the seat to the desired
position.
After releasing the lever, move the seat gently
forward or back to make sure it engages prop-
erly.
Height
Pull lever 2 and apply your weight to the seat or
lift it off, as necessary.
Backrest
Pull lever 3 and apply your weight to the back-
rest or lift it off, as necessary.
Tilt*
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat
or lift it off, as necessary.
Thigh support*
Pull the lever and move the thigh support for-
ward or back.
Electrical adjustment*
Observe the adjustment instructions
above to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
47
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1 Longitudinal direction
2 Height
3 Angle
4 Backrest
The head restraints are adjusted manually, refer
to Head restraints on page 47.
Lumbar support*
You can also adjust the contour of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar
region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive sup-
plementary support to help you maintain a
relaxed, upright sitting position.
> Increase or decrease curvature: press the
switch at the front or rear, respectively.
> Shift curvature up or down: press the switch
at the top or bottom, respectively.
Backrest width*
You can change the width of the backrest to suit
your individual preferences by adjusting the lat-
eral-support pads.
Press the front or rear end of the switch.
Backrest width decreases or increases accord-
ingly.
To move the front seats forward or backward
from outside or from one of the rear seats: with
the door open, press the front end 1 or rear end
2 of the switch.
Head restraints
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that its center is at approx. ear level. Oth-
erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident. Only remove a head
restraint if no one will be sitting on the seat in
question. Reinstall the head restraint before
transporting anyone on that seat. Otherwise,
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Adjustments
48
the passenger will be without protection from
the head restraint.<
Front seats
Height adjustment
> To raise: pull up.
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
slide the head restraint down.
Removing
1. Pull it up as far as it will go.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint all the way out.
Rear seats
Coupe: height adjustment
> To raise: pull up.
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
slide the head restraint down.
Convertible: raising and lowering
Only lower the head restraints if there are
no passengers in the rear. Raise all low-
ered head restraints before transporting pas-
sengers in the rear.<
> To raise: pull up.
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
slide the head restraint down, arrow 2.
Removing
1. Pull it up as far as it will go.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint all the way out.
Coupe: folding head restraint down and
up*
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, it may
contain foldable head restraints.
Folding down:
Press the button, arrow 1.
Folding up:
Pull the head restraint.
Only fold down the head restraints if there
are no passengers in the rear. Fold up the
head restraints again before transporting pas-
sengers in the rear.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
49
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Seat with manual longitudinal
adjustment
Convenient entry
The convenient entry feature includes a mem-
ory function for the longitudinal adjustment and
backrest angle.
1. Pull lever 1 and swing the backrest forward.
2. Push the seat forward.
Previous position
Push the seat backward and swing the backrest
back.
When pushing the seat into its rearmost
position, make sure that no one is injured
and that no objects are damaged.
Before driving off, engage both seats and back-
rests so that they are locked in place. Otherwise
there is a risk of accident due to an unexpected
movement.<
Seat with electrical longitudinal
adjustment
Convenient entry
The convenient entry feature includes a mem-
ory function for the longitudinal adjustment and
backrest angle.
1. Pull lever 1 and swing the backrest forward.
2. Press the front end 2 of the switch until the
seat has moved into the desired position.
Previous position
Press the rear end 3 of the switch until the seat
automatically stops in its previous position, and
fold the backrest back. If you release the switch
before the previous seat position is reached,
the seat will stop at its current position.
When sliding the seat backward, make
sure no one is injured and no objects are
damaged.
Before driving off, engage both seats and back-
rests so that they are locked in place. Otherwise
there is a risk of accident due to an unexpected
movement.<
Heated seats*
Press once for each temperature level.
Three LEDs indicate the highest temperature.
To switch off:
Press button longer.
If you continue driving within approx.
15 minutes, the seat heating is automatically
activated at the previously set temperature.
The temperature is lowered or the heating is
switched off entirely to save on battery power.
The LEDs stay lit.
Seat and mirror memory*
You can store and call up two different combi-
nations of driver's-seat and exterior-mirror
positions.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Adjustments
50
Settings for the backrest width and lumbar sup-
port are not stored in memory.
Storing
1. Switch on radio readiness or the ignition,
refer to page 58.
2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the
desired positions.
3. Press the button.
The LED in the button lights up.
4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2: the
LED goes out.
Call-up
Do not call up memory while you are driv-
ing, otherwise unexpected seat move-
ment could result in an accident.<
Convenience mode
1. Unlock and open the driver's door or switch
on radio readiness, refer to page 58.
2. Lightly push the desired memory button 1
or 2.
The adjusting procedure is halted when you
touch a seat adjustment switch or one of
the memory buttons.
Safety feature
1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni-
tion on or off, refer to page 58.
2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2
and keep it pressed until the adjustment
process has been completed.
If the button was pressed accidentally:
Press the button again; the LED goes out.
Call-up with the remote control
The driver's seat position last stored is stored
for the remote control currently in use.
You can select the occasion on which the seat is
reset to that position.
> Call-up when the vehicle is unlocked.
> Call-up when the driver's door is opened.
When this Personal Profile function is
used, first make sure that the footwell
behind the driver's seat is free of obstacles.
Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or
damage to objects as a result of a rearward
movement of the seat.<
The adjusting procedure is halted when you
touch a seat adjustment switch or one of the
memory buttons.
Selecting automatic call-up
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Door locks" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Central locking" and press the con-
troller.
7. Select "Last seat pos." and press the con-
troller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
51
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
8. Select "After unlocking" or "After door
opened".
9. Press the controller.
Switching off automatic call-up
Select "Deactivated" and press the controller.
Safety belts
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 45 to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants
wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the
safety belt as an additional safety device, but
they do not represent a substitute.
Closing
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
The upper belt anchor is suitable for adults of
any stature as long as the seat is adjusted prop-
erly, refer to page 45.
Opening
1. Grasp the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the buckle.
3. Guide the belt into its reel.
'Fasten safety belts' reminder for front
seats
The indicator lamps come on and an
acoustic signal sounds. In addition, a
message appears on the Control Dis-
play. Check whether the safety belt
has been fastened correctly.
The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is issued as
long as the driver's safety belt has not been fas-
tened. The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is also
issued above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h if the front
passenger's safety belt has not been fastened,
if there are objects on the front passenger's
seat or if the driver or front passenger unfasten
their safety belts.
Damage to safety belts
If the safety belts are damaged or
stressed in an accident: have the belt sys-
tem, including any belt tensioners or child-
restraint systems, replaced and the belt
anchors checked. Have this work done only by
your BMW center or at a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. Otherwise, it is
not guaranteed that the safety devices will func-
tion properly.<
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
The front passenger's mirror is more con-
vex than the driver's mirror. The objects
seen in the mirror are closer than they appear.
Do not gauge your distance from traffic behind
you on the basis of what you see in the mirror;
otherwise there is an increased risk of an acci-
dent.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Adjustments
52
1 Adjustments
2 Switching to the other mirror or automatic
curb monitor
*
3 Folding mirrors in and out
*
The setting for the exterior mirrors is stored for
the remote control currently in use
*
. The stored
position is called up automatically when the
vehicle is unlocked.
Manual adjustment
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually:
press the edge of the glass.
Folding mirrors in and out*
At driving speeds up to approx. 12 mph/
20 km/h, you can fold the mirrors in and out by
pressing button 3. This can be beneficial in nar-
row streets, for example, or for moving mirrors
that were folded in by hand back out into their
correct positions. Mirrors that were folded in are
folded out automatically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Depending on the outside temperature, both
exterior mirrors are heated automatically when
the engine is running or the ignition is switched
on.
Passenger-side mirror tilt function –
automatic curb monitor*
Activating
1. Push the switch to the position for the
driver's-side mirror, arrow 1.
2. Engage reverse gear or move the selector
lever to position R.
The glass of the mirror on the passenger
side tilts slightly down. This allows the
driver to see the area immediately adjacent
to the vehicle, e.g. a curb, when backing into
a parking space.
Deactivating
Push the switch to the position for the passen-
ger-side mirror, arrow 2.
Interior rearview mirror
Turn the knob to reduce glare from the head-
lamps of cars behind you when driving at night.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
53
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Interior and exterior mirrors, automatic
dimming feature*
The automatic dimming feature of the interior
and exterior mirrors
*
is controlled by two photo
cells in the interior rearview mirror. One photo
cell is in the mirror frame, see arrow; the other is
on the back of the mirror.
In order to ensure that the system functions
correctly, keep the photo cells clean, do not
cover the area between the interior rearview
mirror and windshield, and do not affix adhesive
labels or stickers of any kind to the windshield
directly in front of the mirror.
Steering wheel
Adjustments
Do not adjust the steering wheel position
while the car is in motion, otherwise there
is a risk of accident due to an unexpected move-
ment.<
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seated posi-
tion.
3. Swing the lever back up.
Do not use force to swing the lever
back up, otherwise the mechanism
will be damaged.<
Programmable buttons on the steering
wheel
You can program the buttons individually.
These settings are stored for the remote con-
trol currently in use.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Steering wheel buttons" and press
the controller.
A list showing various functions is dis-
played:
> "Navigation voice instructions"
Voice messages from the navigation
system
> "Air recirculation on / off"
To shut off the supply of outside air per-
manently, refer to Automatic recircu-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Adjustments
54
lated-air control AUC/Recirculated-air
mode on page 99
> "Mute on / off"
To mute the audio sources
> "Telephone list"
To switch between any menu and tele-
phone
> "Next entertainment source"
To change the audio source
> "Display open / close"
To open and close the screen
5. Select the desired function and press the
controller.
6. Select a button, if appropriate, and press
the controller.
You can operate the selected function using the
corresponding button.
Operating a function
Briefly press the appropriate button on the
steering wheel.
If you have programmed "Navigation voice
instructions" for one of the buttons:
> Switch voice instructions on/off:
Press the button for a longer period.
> To repeat the last voice instruction:
Press the button briefly.
> To cancel a voice instruction during an
announcement:
Press the button briefly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
55
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Transporting children safely
The right place for children
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, otherwise they could endanger
themselves and/or other persons by opening
the doors, for example.<
Children always in the rear
Accident research has shown that the safest
place for children is on the rear seat.
Children under the age of 13 or smaller
than 5 ft/150 cm may be transported only
in the rear in suitable child-restraint systems
appropriate for their age, weight and size. Oth-
erwise there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident.<
Children 13 years of age or older must be buck-
led in with a safety belt as soon as there no
longer is any child-restraint system that is
appropriate for their age, size and weight.
Exception for front passenger seat
Should it be necessary to use a child-
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, the front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger must be deactivated. Otherwise, a child
traveling on that seat will face a significant risk
of injury if the airbags are triggered off, even
with a child-restraint system.<
For more information on automatic deactivation
of the front passenger airbags refer to page 89.
Installing child-restraint
systems
Observe the child-restraint system man-
ufacturer's instructions when selecting,
installing and using child-restraint systems.
Otherwise the protective effect may be dimin-
ished. <
Standard child-restraint systems are designed
to be secured with a lap belt or with the lap-belt
section of a lap-and-shoulder belt. Incorrectly
or improperly installed child-restraint systems
can increase the risk of injury to children.
Always follow the installation instructions for
the system with the greatest care.
On the front passenger seat
After installing a child-restraint system on
the front passenger seat, make sure that
the front and side airbags for the front passen-
ger are deactivated, otherwise there is an
increased risk of injury if the airbags deploy.<
Backrest width*
The backrest width of the front passen-
ger's seat must be at its widest possible
setting. Do not change the setting after install-
ing the child seat. Otherwise the child seat's
stability on the front passenger's seat is lim-
ited.<
1. Adjust the backrest width to its widest set-
ting, refer to page 47.
2. Install the child seat.
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger's
safety belt can be prevented from being pulled
out in order to fasten child-restraint systems.
To lock the safety belt
1. Secure the child-restraint system with the
belt.
2. Pull the belt strap all the way out.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Transporting children safely
56
3. Allow the belt strap to retract and pull it taut
against the child-restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
To unlock the safety belt
1. Open the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child-restraint system.
3. Allow the safety belt strap to retract all the
way.
LATCH child-restraint fixing
system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil-
dren.
To install and use the LATCH child
restraint system, follow the operating and
safety instructions provided by the manufac-
turer of the system, otherwise the protective
function of the seat may be compromised.<
Before installing the child seat, pull the belt out
of the area for the child-restraint fixing system.
Ensure that both lower LATCH anchors
are correctly engaged and that the child
restraint system is resting firmly against the
backrest, otherwise the protective function of
the seat may be compromised.<
Coupe: rear seats
The anchor points for the lower LATCH
anchors are located behind the labeled protec-
tive caps.
Convertible: rear seats
The anchor points for the lower LATCH
anchors are located at the positions indicated
by arrows, in the gap between the seat and the
backrest.
Coupe: child-restraint system with
tether strap
Use the top tether anchors to secure
child-restraint systems only, otherwise
the anchors could be damaged.<
For child-restraint systems with tether straps
there are two additional anchors, see arrows.
Coupe: placement of the tether strap
Make sure the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not
twisted as it passes to the top anchor. Other-
wise the strap will not properly secure the child-
restraint system in the event of an accident.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
57
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor
5 Rear window shelf
6 Seat backrest
7 Upper retaining strap of child-restraint sys-
tem
If necessary, fold the head restraints upward
before use.
1. Push the head restraint upward.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the head restraint holders.
3. Use the hook to clip the retaining strap to
the anchor.
4. Push the head restraint into its lowermost
position.
5. Pull the retaining strap taut.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Driving
58
Driving
Ignition lock
Insert the remote control into the
ignition lock
Insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
> Radio readiness is switched on.
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
Convenient access*
If the car is equipped with convenient access,
only insert the remote control into the ignition
lock under special circumstances, refer to
page 36.
Removing the remote control from the
ignition lock
Do not forcibly pull the remote control out
of the ignition lock as this may cause
damage.<
Before removing the remote control, push it all
the way in to release the locking mechanism.
> The ignition is switched off if it was on.
Automatic transmission
You cannot take out the remote control unless
the selector lever is in the P position: interlock.
Start/stop button
Pressing the start/stop button switches radio
readiness or the ignition on or off.
The engine is started when you press the
start/stop button and depress the clutch if
the car has manual transmission, or the brake if
the car has automatic transmission.<
Radio readiness
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
The time and the outside temperature are dis-
played in the instrument cluster.
Radio readiness is switched off automatically:
> When the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock
> In cars with convenient access
*
, by touch-
ing the surface above the door lock, refer to
Locking on page 36
Ignition on
All electrical consumers can operate. The
odometer and trip odometer are displayed in
the instrument cluster.
When the engine is off, please switch off
the ignition and any unnecessary electri-
cal consumers in order to preserve the bat-
tery.<
Radio readiness and ignition off
All indicator and warning lamps as well as dis-
plays in the instrument cluster go out.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
59
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Starting the engine
Do not run the engine in closed rooms,
otherwise the inhalation of toxic exhaust
gases can cause unconsciousness and death.
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,
an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas.
Never leave an unattended vehicle with the
engine running, otherwise such a vehicle repre-
sents a potential safety hazard.
Before leaving the car with the engine running,
place the transmission in neutral or move the
selector lever to position P and forcefully apply
the parking brake to prevent the car from mov-
ing.<
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
away, but at moderate engine speeds.
Avoid frequent starting in quick succes-
sion as well as repeated start attempts in
which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the
fuel is not burned or incompletely burned and
there is a danger of overheating and damaging
the catalytic converter.<
Manual transmission
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with con-
venient access, inside the vehicle, refer to
page 36.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Depress the clutch and shift to neutral posi-
tion.
3. Press the start/stop button.
The starter operates automatically for a certain
time, and stops automatically as soon as the
engine has started.
Automatic transmission
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with con-
venient access, inside the vehicle, refer to
page 36.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Move the selector lever to position P.
3. Press the start/stop button.
The starter operates automatically for a certain
time, and stops automatically as soon as the
engine has started.
Switching off the engine
Always take the remote control with you
when you leave the vehicle.
When parking, apply the parking brake force-
fully, otherwise the vehicle could begin to roll.<
Manual transmission
1. With the car at a standstill, press the start/
stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
4. Removing the remote control from the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 58.
Automatic transmission
1. With the car at a standstill, move the selec-
tor lever to position P.
2. Press the start/stop button.
3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
4. Removing the remote control from the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 58.
Parking brake
The parking brake is primarily intended to pre-
vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it
brakes the rear wheels.
Indicator lamp
The indicator lamp is lit, and when you
drive off a signal sounds in addition.
The parking brake is still applied.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Driving
60
Indicator lamp for Canadian models.
Applying
The lever locks in position automatically.
Releasing
Pull slightly upwards, press the button and
lower the lever.
In exceptional cases, if the parking brake
has to be used to slow or stop the car, do
not pull the lever up too hard. In doing so, con-
tinuously press the button of the parking brake
lever.
Otherwise, excessive force on the parking
brake can lock up the rear wheels and cause the
rear of the car to swerve.<
To prevent corrosion and one-sided brak-
ing action, occasionally apply the parking
brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming
to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable.
The brake lamps do not light up when the park-
ing brake is applied.<
Manual transmission
When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press
the gearshift lever to the right. Otherwise
the engine could be damaged if you inadvert-
ently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.<
Reverse gear
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a
slight resistance has to be overcome.
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic*
In addition to fully automatic operation, you can
also manually shift with the Steptronic, refer to
page 61.
Vehicle parking
To prevent the vehicle from rolling,
always select position P and apply the
parking brake before leaving the vehicle with
the engine running.<
Disengaging the remote control
In order to remove the remote control from the
ignition lock, you must first move the selector
lever to position P and switch off the engine:
interlock. Removing the remote control from
the ignition lock, refer to page 58.
Selector lever positions
P R N D M/S + –
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
61
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Displays in the instrument cluster
P R N D DS M1 to M6
The selector lever position is displayed, or the
current gear in the manual mode.
Changing selector lever positions
> With the ignition switched on or the engine
running, the selector lever can be moved
out of position P: interlock.
> Before moving the lever away from P or N
with the vehicle stationary, first depress the
brake; otherwise the selector lever will
refuse to move: shiftlock.
To prevent the vehicle from creeping
after you select a driving position,
depress the brake until you are ready to
start.<
A lock prevents you from inadvertently engag-
ing selector lever positions R and P. To cancel
the lock, press the button on the front of the
selector lever, see arrow.
P Park
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
The drive wheels are locked.
R Reverse
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral
You can select this in a car wash, for example.
The vehicle can roll.
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for-
ward gears are selected automatically.
Under normal operating conditions, fuel con-
sumption is lowest when you are driving in posi-
tion D.
Kick-down
Kick-down enables you to achieve maximum
performance.
Press the accelerator pedal beyond the full-
throttle resistance point.
Sport program and manual operation
M/S
Move selector lever from position D toward the
left into the M/S shifting slot:
The sport program is activated and DS is dis-
played on the instrument cluster. This position
is recommended for a performance-oriented
driving style.
To use the automatic mode again, move the
selector lever to the right into position D.
Shifting gears via the selector lever
When you press the selector lever forwards or
backwards, the manual mode is activated and
Steptronic changes gear. M1 through M6 are
displayed on the instrument cluster.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Driving
62
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combination
of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example,
a downshift that would cause the engine to
overrev will not be executed by the system. The
gear selected is briefly displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, followed by the gear actually in
use.
Shifting gears via shift paddles* on the
steering wheel
The shift paddles allow you to shift gears
quickly since both hands can remain on the
steering wheel.
> When you use the shift paddles on the
steering wheel to shift gears in automatic
mode, the transmission switches to manual
mode.
> If you do not accelerate or shift gears using
the shift paddles for a certain amount of
time, the transmission switches back to
automatic mode.
If the selector lever is in the M/S gear
plane, manual mode remains active.<
> To shift up: pull one of the shift paddles.
> To shift down: press one of the shift pad-
dles.
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combination
of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example,
a downshift that would cause the engine to
overrev will not be executed by the system. The
gear selected is briefly displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, followed by the gear actually in
use.
Overriding selector lever lock
Should the selector lever refuse to move out of
position P although the button on the selector
lever is pressed, the selector lever lock can be
overridden:
1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever
until the sleeve is inside out.
3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard
tool kit, refer to page 223, press the red
lever, see arrow, while moving the selector
lever to the desired position.
Turn signals/
headlamp flasher
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Turn signals
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To turn off manually, press the lever to the
resistance point.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
63
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp and the turn signals indicates that
one of the turn signal bulbs has failed.<
Indicating a turn briefly
Press the lever as far as the resistance point for
as long as you wish to indicate a turn.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever as far as the resistance point.
The turn signals flash three times.
You can activate or deactivate this function.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Lighting" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Triple turn signal" and press the
controller.
Triple turn signaling is activated.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Wiper system
1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or
rain sensor
*
4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps
*
5 Setting speed for intermittent wipe, or sen-
sitivity of the rain sensor
Switching on wipers
Press the lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial posi-
tion when released.
Normal wiper speed
Press once.
The system switches to operation in the inter-
mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.
Fast wiper speed
Press twice or press beyond the resistance
point.
The system switches to normal speed when the
vehicle is stationary.
Intermittent wipe or rain sensor*
If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the
intermittent-wipe time is a preset.
If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time
between wipes is controlled automatically and
depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The rain
sensor is mounted on the windshield, directly in
front of the interior rearview mirror.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Driving
64
Activating intermittent wipe or rain
sensor
Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the but-
ton lights up.
Setting speed for intermittent wipe or
sensitivity of the rain sensor
Turn the thumb wheel 5.
Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain
sensor
Press the button again, arrow 3.
The LED goes out.
Deactivate the rain sensor before enter-
ing an automatic car wash. Failure to do
so could result in damage caused by undesired
wiper activation.<
Cleaning windshield and headlamps*
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield and
the wipers are operated for a short time.
When the vehicle lighting system is switched
on, the headlamps are cleaned at regular and
appropriate intervals.
Do not use the washers if there is any
danger that the fluid will freeze on the
windshield. If you do, your vision could be
obscured. Antifreeze should therefore be
added to the fluid, refer to Washer fluid.
Do not use the washers when the washer fluid
reservoir is empty, otherwise you will damage
the washer pump.<
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are heated
automatically
*
while the engine is running or
the ignition is switched on.
Washer fluid
Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable.
Therefore, keep it away from ignition
sources and only store it in the closed original
container that is kept out of reach of children,
otherwise there is a risk of personal injury.
Comply with the instructions on the con-
tainer.<
Washer fluid filler neck
Only refill washer fluid when the engine is
cool to avoid contact with hot engine
parts. Otherwise, fluid spills constitute a fire
hazard and a risk to personal safety.<
All washer nozzles are supplied with washer
fluid by the same reservoir.
Fill with water and, if required, with a washer
antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom-
mendations.
Mix the water and antifreeze before filling
the washer fluid reservoir to make sure
the correct concentration is maintained.<
Capacity
Approx. 6.3USquarts/6liters.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
65
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Cruise control*
The concept
You can use the cruise control feature begin-
ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. The car then
stores and maintains the speed that you specify
using the lever on the steering column.
Do not use cruise control when driving at
constant speed is prevented by adverse
conditions, e.g. winding roads, dense traffic or
poor road conditions due to, e.g., snow, rain, ice
or loose surfaces. Otherwise you could lose
control of the vehicle and cause an accident as a
result.<
One lever for all functions
1 Storing and maintaining speed or accelerat-
ing
2 Storing and maintaining speed or deceler-
ating
3 Deactivating cruise control
4 Resuming a speed stored beforehand
Maintaining current speed
Tap the lever, arrow 1, or pull it briefly, arrow 2.
The car's current speed is stored and main-
tained. It is briefly displayed in the instrument
cluster.
If the engine braking power is insufficient on a
downhill slope, the set speed may be exceeded.
On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to
maintain the set speed if engine power output is
insufficient.
Increasing speed
Repeatedly press the lever, arrow 1, until the
desired speed is reached.
Each time the lever is pressed lightly, the speed
is increased by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.
Accelerating using the lever
Press the lever, arrow 1, until the desired speed
is reached.
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on
the accelerator pedal. The system stores and
maintains the speed.
Decreasing speed
Repeatedly pull the lever, arrow 2, until the
desired speed is reached.
The functions are the same as when the set
speed is increased or the vehicle is accelerated,
except that in this case the speed decreases.
Deactivating cruise control
Tap the lever upwards or downwards, arrow 3.
In addition, the system is automatically deacti-
vated:
> When you brake the vehicle
> When you depress the clutch of a manual
transmission or shift to neutral
> When you select the automatic transmis-
sion's neutral position N
> When the vehicle travels faster or slower
than the set speed for an extended period,
e.g. when the accelerator is depressed
> When you activate DTC or deactivate DSC
> When DSC is intervening
Resuming a speed stored beforehand
Press the button, arrow 4.
The last stored speed is resumed and main-
tained.
The stored speed is briefly displayed in the
instrument cluster.
The stored speed is cleared when the ignition is
switched off.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Driving
66
Display in the instrument cluster
When the speed at which the vehicle is traveling
is stored or when a stored speed is called up,
the speed is briefly displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
67
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Everything under control
Odometer, outside
temperature display, clock
1 Knob in the instrument cluster
2 Outside temperature and clock
3 Odometer and trip odometer
Knob in the instrument cluster
> To reset the trip odometer while the ignition
is switched on
> To display the time, outside temperature
and odometer briefly while the ignition is
switched off
Units of measure
To select the respective units of measure, miles
or km for the odometer as well as 7 or 6 for
the outside temperature, refer to Units of mea-
sure on page 71.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Time, outside temperature display
Setting the time, refer to page 75.
Outside temperature warning
When the displayed temperature sinks to
approx. +37 7/+36, a signal sounds and a
warning lamp lights up. There is an increased
risk of black ice.
Black ice can also form at temperatures
above +37 7/+36. You should there-
fore drive carefully on bridges and shaded
roads, for example, otherwise there is an
increased risk of an accident.<
Odometer and trip odometer
Resetting trip odometer:
With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in
the instrument cluster.
When the vehicle is parked
If you still want to view the time, outside tem-
perature and odometer reading briefly after the
remote control has been taken out of the igni-
tion lock:
Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.
Tachometer
Never force the engine speed up into the red
warning field, see arrow. In this range, the fuel
supply is interrupted to protect the engine.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything under control
68
Coolant temperature
A warning lamp will come on if the coolant, and
therefore the engine, becomes too hot.
In addition, a message will appear on the Con-
trol Display.
Check coolant level, refer to page 216.
Engine oil temperature*
When the engine is at normal operating temper-
ature, the engine oil temperature is between
approx. 2107/1006 and approx. 3007/
1506.
If the engine oil temperature is too high, a mes-
sage appears on the Control Display.
Fuel gauge
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 14 US gallons/
53 liters.
You can find information on refueling on
page 202.
If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period,
when you are driving in mountainous areas, for
example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.
Fuel display 135i: in speedometer.
Reserve
Once the fuel level has fallen to the reserve
zone, a message briefly appears on the Control
Display and the cruising range for the remaining
amount of fuel is displayed on the computer.
Under a cruising range of approx. 30 miles/
50 km, the message remains in the Control Dis-
play.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Computer
Displays in the instrument cluster
Calling up information
Press the button in the turn indicator lever.
The following items of information are dis-
played in the order listed:
> Cruising range
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
> Current fuel consumption
> No information
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
69
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
To set the corresponding units of measure,
refer to Adjusting the units of measure on
page 71.
Cruising range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel. The range is calculated
on the basis of the way the car has been driven
over the last 18 miles/30 km and the amount of
fuel currently in the tank.
It is important that you refuel as soon as
possible once your cruising range falls
below 30 miles/50 km, otherwise engine func-
tions are not ensured and damage can occur.<
Average speed
Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine
switched off are not included in the calculations
of average speed.
With the trip computer, refer to page 70, you
can have the average speed for another trip dis-
played.
To reset average speed: press the button in the
turn indicator lever for approx. 2 seconds.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the time during which the engine is running.
With the trip computer, refer to page 70, you
can have the average consumption for another
trip displayed.
To reset average fuel consumption: press the
button in the turn indicator lever for approx.
2seconds.
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current fuel consumption. This
allows you to see whether your current driving
style is conducive to fuel economy with mini-
mum exhaust emissions.
Displays on the Control Display
You can also call up the computer via iDrive; for
the operating principle, refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to call up
"Navigation".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Onboard info" and press the con-
troller.
> Estimated time of arrival at destination:
> Manually enter a distance in the com-
puter, refer to information further below
> Enter a destination in the navigation sys-
tem, refer to page 123
> Cruising range
> Distance to destination:
> Manually enter a distance in the com-
puter, refer to information further below
> Enter a destination in the navigation sys-
tem, refer to page 123
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
Resetting values
You can reset the values for average speed and
average consumption:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything under control
70
1. Select the respective menu item and press
the controller.
2. Press the controller again to confirm your
selection.
Entering a distance manually
1. Select "Distance to dest." and press the
controller.
2. Turn the controller to select the distance to
your destination.
3. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The distance is automatically entered during
destination guidance.
Trip computer
1. Open the start menu.
2. Call up "Navigation".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Trip computer" and press the con-
troller.
> Departure time
> Driving time
> Distance traveled
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
Switching trip computer on/off and resetting all
values to zero:
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
2. Select the desired menu item and press the
controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
71
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Settings and information
Operating principle
1 Button for:
> Selecting display
> Setting values
2 Button for:
> Confirming selected display or set val-
ues
> Calling up computer information 68
3 When the lights are on: instrument lighting
brightness 95
4 Calling up Check Control 77
5 Checking oil level 213
6 Setting the time 75
7 Setting the date 76
8 Viewing service requirement display 72
Exiting displays
The outside-temperature reading and the time
reappear when you press button 2 or if you
make no entries within approx. 15 seconds. If
required, complete the current setting first.
Units of measure
You can set units of measure.
Adjusting the units of measure
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Language / Units" and press the
controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything under control
72
until "Units" is selected and press the con-
troller.
6. Select the desired menu item and press the
controller.
7. Select the desired measurement unit and
press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Service requirements
The remaining driving distance and the date of
the next scheduled service are displayed briefly
immediately after you start the engine or switch
on the ignition.
The extent of service work required can
be read out from the remote control by
your BMW Service Advisor.<
For certain maintenance operations, you can
view the respective distance remaining or due
date individually in the instrument cluster.
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 58.
2. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the words "SERVICE-INFO".
3. Press button 2.
4. Use button 1 to scroll through the individual
service items.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
73
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Possible displays
1 Button for selecting functions
2 Service requirements
3 Engine oil
4 Roadworthiness test
*
5 Front brake pads
6 Rear brake pads
7 Brake fluid
The sequence of displayed service items may
vary. The data for the next service appointment
is shown first.
Supplementary information
You can call up additional information on the
maintenance regimen on the Control Display.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Service Info" and press the control-
ler.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Service requirements" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Status" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything under control
74
A list of selected maintenance operations and, if
applicable, inspections required by law is dis-
played.
You can request more detailed information on
every entry:
Select the entry and press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Select and press the controller.
Symbols
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a legally man-
dated inspection is approaching. Please
schedule a service appointment.
The service deadline has already passed.
Entering deadlines for legally required
inspections*
Make sure the date on the Control Display is
always set correctly, refer to page 76, otherwise
the effectiveness of Condition Based Service
CBS is not ensured.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Service Info" and press the control-
ler.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Service requirements" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Status" and press the controller.
7. Select "State inspection" and press the
controller.
8. Select "Set service date" and press the
controller. The month is highlighted.
9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
10. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The year is highlighted.
11. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
12. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The date entry is stored.
To exit from the menu:
Select and press the controller.
More information on the BMW Maintenance
System can be found on page 217.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
75
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Clock
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 28.
Setting the time
In the instrument cluster
To set the 12h/24h format, refer to Setting the
12h/24h format.
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the time and the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Use button 1 to set the hours.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Use button 1 to set the minutes.
6. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
7. Press button 2.
The system accepts the new time.
Via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button once or twice until
the start menu appears.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Time / Date" is
selected and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the controller forward
once to switch to the uppermost field.
6. Turn the controller until "Time" is selected
and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything under control
76
7. Turn the controller until "Set time" is
selected and press the controller.
Adjusting settings
8. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
9. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
The system accepts the new time.
Switching on the hour signal*
You will hear three tones just before each full
hour.
Select "Hour memo" and press the controller.
The hour signal is activated.
Setting the 12h/24h format
1. Select "Time format" and press the control-
ler.
2. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
Date
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 28.
Setting the date
In the instrument cluster
To set the DD.MM or MM/DD date format, refer
to Setting the date format.
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the date and the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Use button 1 to set the day of the month.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Set the month and the year in the same way.
6. Press button 2.
The system stores the new date.
Via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Time / Date" and press the control-
ler.
5. Select "Date" and press the controller.
6. Select "Set date" and press the controller.
The first setting of the date display is now
highlighted, in this case the day.
7. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
77
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The next setting is highlighted.
9. Make the remaining adjustments. After the
last adjustment, the date is stored.
Setting the date format
1. Select "Date format" and press the control-
ler.
2. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control monitors vehicle functions
and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys-
tems monitored. Such a Check Control mes-
sage includes indicator and warning lamps in
the instrument cluster and, in some circum-
stances, a signal as well as text messages at the
bottom of the Control Display.
Indicator and warning lamps
Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a
variety of combinations and colors.
indicates that Check Control messages have
been stored. You can view the Check Control
messages whenever it is convenient for you.
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the lower edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed
indicator and warning lamps.
For most Check Control messages, you can
view more information later, e.g. regarding the
cause of a malfunction and how to respond,
refer to the information provided below.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
To exit the displayed information:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything under control
78
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the button in the turn indicator lever.
Some Check Control messages are displayed
until the respective malfunction has been recti-
fied. They cannot be hidden. If several malfunc-
tions occur at the same time, they are displayed
in succession.
They are marked with the symbol shown
here.
Other Check Control messages are automati-
cally hidden after approx. 20 seconds, but are
kept in memory.
They are marked with the symbol shown
here.
Viewing stored Check Control
messages
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the words "CHECK".
2. Press button 2.
"CHECK OK" appears if there are no Check
Control messages. If a Check Control mes-
sage has been stored, the corresponding
lamp comes on. It is accompanied by a text
message on the Control Display.
3. Push button 1 to check for other messages.
4. Press button 2.
The display again shows the outside tem-
perature and the time.
Viewing more information later
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Service Info" and press the control-
ler.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Check Control messages" is selected
and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
79
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
6. Select a text message and press the con-
troller.
To exit the display:
Select and press the controller.
Speed limit*
You can enter a speed, and a Check Control
message will indicate when you reach this
speed. This enables you, for example, to
receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in
an urban area.
You are only warned of reaching this speed a
second time if your vehicle speed falls below it
again by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Call up "Navigation".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Limit" and press the controller.
Setting or changing the limit
1. Select the speed and press the controller.
2. Turn the controller to set the limit.
3. Press the controller to apply the setting.
Applying your current speed as limit
Select "Select current speed" and press the
controller. The system adopts your current
speed as the limit.
Activating the limit
Select "On" and press the controller.
Limit is activated.
Stopwatch
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Call up "Navigation".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Stopwatch" and press the control-
ler.
> Starting, stopping or resetting the stop-
watch
> Taking an interim time reading
Starting, stopping or resetting
> Select "Start" and press the controller.
The stopwatch starts at the displayed time.
> Select "Reset" and press the controller.
The stopwatch is reset and restarts if it was
running beforehand.
> Select "Stop" and press the controller.
This stops the timer.
Taking an interim time reading
Select "Interim time" and press the controller.
The interim time appears below the ongoing
primary stopwatch count.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything under control
80
All of the remaining functions remain
available at all times while the stopwatch
is running. The stopwatch continues operation
in the background.<
Altering settings
Language on the Control Display
The language of the Control Display can be set.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Language / Units" and press the
controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Languages" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Text language" and press the con-
troller. You can switch to another language
for the display texts and navigation mes-
sages.
7. Select and activate the desired language by
pressing the controller.
Brightness of the Control Display
The brightness is automatically adapted to the
ambient lighting conditions. Note, however,
that you can change the basic setting while the
low beams are switched on. The setting is
stored for the remote control currently in use.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Display settings" and press the
controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Brightness" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
81
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Technology for driving comfort and safety
Park Distance Control PDC*
The concept
The PDC assists you with maneuvering in tight
parking spaces. Acoustic signals and a visual
indicator
warn you of the presence of an object
behind your vehicle. Four ultrasonic sensors in
the bumper measure the distance.
These sensors have a range of approx. 6.5 ft/
2 m. However, an acoustic warning does not
sound until an object is approx. 2 ft/60 cm from
the corner sensors, or approx. 5 ft/1.50 m from
the center sensors.
PDC is a parking aid that can indicate
objects when they are approached
slowly, as is usually the case when parking.
Avoid approaching an object at high speed, oth-
erwise physical circumstances may lead to the
system warning being issued too late.<
Switching on automatically
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, the system is activated after approx. 1 sec-
ond when you engage reverse gear or move the
automatic transmission selector lever to
position R. Wait this short period before driving.
Switching off automatically
After approx. 55 yd/50 m of driving or above
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h, the system switches
off and the LED goes out.
Signal tones
When nearing an object, its position is indicated
correspondingly by an interval tone. As the dis-
tance between vehicle and object decreases,
the intervals between the tones become
shorter. If the distance to the nearest object
falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a contin-
uous tone sounds.
An interval tone is interrupted after approx.
3seconds:
> If you remain in front of an object that has
been detected by only one of the corner
sensors
> If you are driving parallel to a wall
Malfunction
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on. PDC is malfunc-
tioning. A message appears on the
Control Display. Have the system checked.
To avoid this problem, keep the sensors clean
and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that
they will continue to operate effectively. When
using a high-pressure cleaner, do not direct the
jet toward the sensors for lengthy periods and
only spray from a distance of at least 4 in/10 cm.
PDC with visual warning
You can also have the system show distances
to objects on the Control Display. The contours
of distant objects are shown on the Control Dis-
play even before the acoustic signal sounds.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
82
until "PDC" is selected and press the con-
troller.
6. Select "PDC display on" and press the con-
troller.
The PDC screen is activated.
The display is shown on the Control Display as
soon as PDC is activated.
System limitations
Even with PDC, final responsibility for
estimating the distance between the
vehicle and any obstructions always remains
with the driver. Even when sensors are pro-
vided, there is a blind spot in which objects can
no longer be detected. The system is also sub-
ject to the physical limits that apply to all forms
of ultrasonic measurement, such as those
encountered with trailer towbars and hitches,
thin or wedge-shaped objects, etc. Low objects
that have already been displayed, e.g. curbs,
can disappear again from the detection area of
the sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds. Higher, protruding objects, e.g. ledges,
cannot be detected. Loud sound sources out-
side or inside the car can drown out the PDC
signal. Therefore, always drive cautiously, oth-
erwise there is a risk of personal injury or prop-
erty damage.<
Driving stability control
systems
Your BMW has a number of systems that help
to maintain the vehicle's stability even in
adverse driving conditions.
Antilock Brake System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking. Safe steering response is maintained
even during full braking. Active safety is thus
increased.
The ABS is operational every time you start the
engine. Braking safely, refer to page 116.
Electronic brake-force distribution
EBV
The system controls the brake pressure in the
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.
Dynamic Brake Control DBC
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost and thus helps to achieve the short-
est possible braking distance during full brak-
ing. This system exploits all of the benefits pro-
vided by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake for the
duration of the full braking application.
Dynamic Stability Control DSC
DSC prevents the driving wheels from losing
traction when you pull away from rest or accel-
erate. The system also recognizes unstable
driving conditions, for example if the rear of the
car is about to swerve or if momentum is acting
at an angle past the front wheels. In these
cases, DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe
course within physical limits by reducing engine
output and through braking actions at the indi-
vidual wheels.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed,
even with DSC. An appropriate driving
style always remains the responsibility of the
driver. Therefore, do not reduce the additional
safety margin again by taking risks, as this could
result in an accident.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
83
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Deactivating DSC
Press the button for at least 3 seconds; the indi-
cator lamps for DSC in the instrument cluster
light up. Dynamic Traction Control DTC and
DSC have been simultaneously deactivated.
Stabilizing and drive-output promoting actions
are no longer executed.
In the same way as with a differential interlock,
even if DSC is deactivated, brake actions are
still performed on the rear axle to enhance drive
output if the drive wheels experience a signifi-
cant loss of traction.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Activating DSC
Press the button again; the indicator lamps for
DSC in the instrument cluster go out.
For better control
If the indicator lamp flashes:
DSC is regulating the drive and braking
forces.
If the indicator lamps are on:
DSC is deactivated.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC
DTC is a version of DSC in which the drive out-
put is optimized for particular road conditions,
e.g. unplowed snow-covered roads. The sys-
tem assures the maximal drive output, but with
reduced driving stability. It is therefore neces-
sary to drive with appropriate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:
> When driving uphill on snow-covered roads,
in slush or on unplowed, snow-covered
roads
> When rocking a stuck vehicle free or start-
ing off in deep snow or on loose ground
> When driving with snow chains
Activating DTC
Press the button; the indicator lamps for DTC in
the instrument cluster come on.
For better control
If the indicator lamp flashes:
DTC is regulating the drive and braking
forces.
If the indicator lamps are on:
DTC has been activated.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again; the DTC indicator
lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
Drive-off assistant
The drive-off assistant enables you to drive off
smoothly on uphill gradients. It is not necessary
to use the parking brake for this.
1. Hold the car in place by depressing the
brake.
2. Release the brake and drive off without
delay.
The drive-off assistant holds the car in
place for approx. 2 seconds after the
brake is released. Drive off without delay after
releasing the brake. Otherwise, the drive-off
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
84
assistant will no longer hold the car in place
after approx. 2 seconds and the car will start to
roll backwards.<
Flat Tire Monitor FTM*
The concept
The Flat Tire Monitor detects pressure loss in a
tire by comparing the rotating speeds of the
individual tires while moving.
In the event of pressure loss, the rolling circum-
ference changes and, thus, the rotating speed
of the affected wheel. This change is detected
and is reported as a flat tire.
Functional requirement
In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat
tire, the system must be initialized for the cor-
rect tire inflation pressure.
The system must be reinitialized each
time a tire inflation pressure has been cor-
rected or a wheel or tire has been changed.<
System limitations
The Flat Tire Monitor is unable to warn
the driver of sudden, severe tire damage
caused by external factors, nor can it identify
the gradual loss of pressure that will inevitably
occur in all four tires over a lengthy period of
time.<
In the following situations, the system could be
delayed or malfunction:
> System has not been initialized
> Driving on snowy or slippery road surface
> Performance-oriented style of driving: slip
in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration
> Snow chains are attached
Initializing the system
The initialization is completed during driv-
ing, which can be interrupted at any time.
When driving resumes, the initialization is con-
tinued automatically.
Do not initialize the system while snow chains
are attached.<
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "FTM" is selected and press the con-
troller.
6. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
7. Select "Reset" and press the controller.
8. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
9. Start to drive.
Initialization is completed while the car is on
the move, without any feedback.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
85
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamps come on in yellow
and red. A message appears on the
Control Display. In addition, a signal
sounds. There is a flat tire or substan-
tial loss of tire pressure.
1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/
80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steer-
ing maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
If the car is not equipped with Run-
Flat Tires, refer to page 210, the stan-
dard equipment by design, do not continue
driving. A severe accident could result if you
continue driving after a tire puncture.<
2. At the next opportunity, check the air pres-
sure in all four tires.
If all four tires are inflated to the cor-
rect pressures, the Flat Tire Monitor
might not have been initialized. The system
must then be initialized.<
3. In the event of complete tire pressure loss,
0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the distance
for which you can continue driving on the
basis of the following guidelines:
> With a light load:
1 to 2 persons without luggage:
approx. 155 miles/250 km
> With a medium load:
2 persons, cargo bay full, or 4 persons
without luggage:
approx. 90 miles/150 km
> With a full load:
4 persons, cargo bay full:
approx. 30 miles/50 km
Drive cautiously and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h, otherwise
there is a risk of an accident. In the event of
pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This
includes reduced tracking stability in braking,
extended braking distance and altered natural
steering characteristics.
If unusual vibration or loud noises occur during
the journey, this may be an indication that the
damaged tire has finally failed. Reduce your
speed and pull over as soon as possible at a
suitable location. Otherwise parts of the tire
could come loose, resulting in an accident. Do
not continue driving. Instead, contact your
BMW center.<
Malfunction
The warning lamps come on in yel-
low. A message appears on the Con-
trol Display. The Flat Tire Monitor has
a malfunction or has failed. Have the
system checked as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM*
The concept
TPM checks the inflation pressures of the four
mounted tires. The system notifies you if there
is a significant loss of pressure in one or more
tires.
Functional requirement
In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat
tire, the system must be reset while all tire infla-
tion pressures are correct.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics. Oth-
erwise, the system may malfunction.
Each time a tire inflation pressure has
been corrected or a wheel or tire has been
changed, reset the system.<
System limitations
TPM cannot warn you in advance of sud-
den severe tire damage caused by out-
side influences.<
The system does not work correctly if it has not
been reset; for example, a flat tire may be indi-
cated even though the tire inflation pressures
are correct.
The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat
tire if a wheel without TPM electronics, such as
a compact spare wheel, has been mounted, or if
TPM is temporarily malfunctioning due to other
systems or devices using the same radio fre-
quency.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
86
Status indicator on the Control Display
The color of the wheels represents the status of
the tires and the system.
TPM takes into account that tire pressures
change while the vehicle is being driven. The
tire pressures do not need to be corrected
unless the TPM instructs you to do so by means
of color indicators.
Green
The tire inflation pressure corresponds to the
established target value.
"TPM active" appears on the Control Display.
One wheel yellow
There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pres-
sure in the indicated tire. A message appears on
the Control Display.
All wheels yellow
There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pres-
sure in several tires. A message appears on the
Control Display.
Gray
The system cannot detect a puncture.
Possible reasons for this:
> TPM is being reset
> Temporary malfunction caused by systems
or devices using the same radio frequency
> Malfunction
Resetting the system
Each time a tire inflation pressure has
been corrected or a wheel or tire has been
changed, reset the system.<
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "TPM" is selected and press the con-
troller.
6. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
7. Select "Reset" and press the controller.
8. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
9. Start to drive.
The wheels are shown in gray and "Reset-
ting TPM..." is displayed.
After driving a few minutes, the set inflation
pressures in the tires are accepted as the target
values to be monitored. The system reset is
completed during your drive, and can be inter-
will be adapted
will be adapted
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
87
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
rupted at any time. When driving resumes, the
reset is continued automatically. On the Control
Display, the wheels are shown in green and
"Status: TPM active" is displayed again.
If a flat tire is detected while the system is
resetting and determining the inflation
pressures, all wheels on the Control Display are
displayed in yellow. The message "Tire low!" is
shown.<
Message for low tire inflation pressure
The warning lamps come on in yellow
and red. A message appears on the
Control Display. In addition, a signal
sounds. There is a flat tire or substan-
tial loss of tire pressure.
1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/
80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steer-
ing maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
If the car is not equipped with Run-
Flat Tires, refer to page 210, the stan-
dard equipment by design, do not continue
driving. Otherwise a severe accident could
result after a tire puncture if you continue
driving.<
2. In the event of complete pressure loss,
0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible
distance for continued driving on the basis
of the following guidelines:
> With a light load:
1 to 2 persons without luggage:
approx. 155 miles/250 km
> With a medium load:
2 persons, cargo bay full, or 4 persons
without luggage:
approx. 95 miles/150 km
> With a full load:
4 persons, cargo bay full:
approx. 30 miles/50 km
Drive cautiously and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. In the event of
pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This
includes reduced tracking stability in braking,
extended braking distance and altered natural
steering characteristics.
If unusual vibration or loud noises occur during
the journey, this may be an indication that the
damaged tire has finally failed. Reduce your
speed and pull over as soon as possible at a
suitable location. Otherwise parts of the tire
could come loose, resulting in an accident. Do
not continue driving. Instead, contact your
BMW center.<
Malfunction
The small warning lamp flashes in
yellow and then lights up continu-
ously; the larger warning lamp comes
on in yellow. On the Control Display,
the wheels are shown in gray and a message
appears. No punctures can be detected.
This type of message is shown in the following
situations:
> If there is a malfunction
Have the system checked.
> If a wheel without TPM electronics has
been mounted
> If TPM is temporarily malfunctioning due to
other systems or devices using the same
radio frequency.
Message for unsuccessful system
reset
The warning lamp lights up yellow. A
message appears on the Control Dis-
play. The system is not reset after a
tire has been changed, for example.
Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the
system, refer to page 86.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138
Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems
Each tire should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire infla-
tion pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As
an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
88
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem, TPMS, that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires are signif-
icantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s han-
dling and stopping ability. Please note that the
TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underin-
flation has not reached the level at which the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale illuminates.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-
tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously lit. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Active steering*
The concept
Active steering varies the turning angle of the
front wheels in relation to steering wheel move-
ments. It also varies the steering force required
to turn the wheels depending on the speed at
which you are driving.
When you are driving in the low road-speed
range, e.g. in a town or when parking, the steer-
ing angle increases, i.e. the steering becomes
very direct, and less effort is required to turn the
wheels. In the higher speed range, on the other
hand, the steering angle is reduced more and
more. This improves the handling capability of
your BMW over the entire speed range.
In critical situations, the system can make tar-
geted corrections to the steering angle pro-
vided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle
before the driver intervenes. This stabilizing
intervention is simultaneously deactivated
when DSC is switched off, refer to page 82.
Malfunction
The warning lamps come on. Active
steering is no longer operational. At
low speeds, greater steering wheel
movements are required, whereas at
higher speeds the vehicle reacts more sensi-
tively to steering wheel movements. The stabil-
ity-enhancing feature may also be deactivated.
Drive cautiously and think well ahead. Have the
system checked.
Brake Force Display*
On the left: normal braking.
On the right: sharp braking.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
89
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Airbags
The following airbags are located under the
marked covers:
1 Front airbags
2 Coupe: head airbags
3 Side airbags in the seat backrests
4 Convertible: knee airbags
Protective action
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 45 to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
The front airbags help protect the driver and
front passenger by responding to frontal
impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro-
vide adequate restraint. When needed, the
head and side airbags help provide protection in
the event of side impact. The relevant side air-
bag supports the side upper body area. The
head air bag supports the head.
The airbags have been designed to not be trig-
gered in every collision situation, e.g. not in
minor accidents or rear-end collisions.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the
cover panels of the airbags, cover them or
modify them in any other way. Do not attach
seat covers, cushions or other objects not spe-
cifically approved for seats with integral side air-
bags to the front seats. Do not hang items of
clothing such as coats or jackets over the back-
rests. Do not attempt to remove the airbag
retention system from the vehicle. Do not mod-
ify the individual components of the system or
its wiring in any way. This includes the uphol-
stered covers on the steering wheel, instrument
panel, seats and roof posts, as well as the sides
of the roof lining. Do not attempt to remove or
dismantle the steering wheel.
Do not touch the individual components imme-
diately after the system has been triggered,
because there is a danger of burns.
In the event of malfunctions, deactivation or
triggering of the airbag restraint system, have
the testing, repair, removal and disposal of air-
bag generators executed only by a BMW center
or a workshop that works according to repair
procedures of BMW with correspondingly
trained personnel and that has the required
explosives licenses. Unprofessional attempts to
work on the system could lead to failure in an
emergency or to undesired airbag activation,
either of which could result in personal injury.<
Warning notices and information about the air-
bags can also be found on the sun visors.
Automatic deactivation of the front
passenger airbags
An analysis of the impression in the front pas-
senger seat cushion determines whether and
how the seat is occupied. The front and side air-
bags for the front passenger are activated or
deactivated by the system accordingly.
The indicator lamp above the interior
rearview mirror shows the current status
of the front passenger airbags, deactivated or
activated, refer to Status of front passenger air-
bags below.<
Before transporting a child on the front
passenger seat, read the safety precau-
tions and handling instructions under Trans-
porting children safely, refer to page 55.
The front and side airbags can also be deacti-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
90
vated by adolescents and adults sitting in cer-
tain positions; the indicator lamp for the front
passenger airbags comes on. In such cases, the
passenger should change his or her sitting
position so that the front passenger airbags are
activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the
desired airbag status cannot be achieved by
changing the sitting position, transport the rele-
vant passenger on a rear seat. Do not attach
seat covers, seat cushion padding, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat unless
they are specifically recommended by BMW.
Do not place any items under the seat which
could press against the seat from below. Other-
wise a correct analysis of the seat cushion is not
ensured.<
Status of front passenger airbags
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air-
bags shows the functional status of the front
passenger's front and side airbags in accor-
dance with whether and how the front passen-
ger seat is occupied. The indicator lamp shows
whether the front passenger airbags are acti-
vated or deactivated.
> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in
a specially designated child-restraint sys-
tem is detected, as intended, on the seat.
The front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger are not activated.
Most child seats are detected by the
system, especially child seats
required by the NHTSA at the time of vehi-
cle production. After mounting a child seat,
ensure that the indicator lamp for the front
passenger airbag is lit. It indicates that the
child seat has been detected and that the
front passenger airbags are deactivated.<
> The indicator lamp does not come on as
long as a person of sufficient size and in a
correct sitting position is detected on the
seat.
The front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger are activated.
> The indicator lamp does not come on if the
seat is empty.
The front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger are not activated.
Operational readiness of airbag system
As of radio readiness, refer to page 58, the
warning lamp comes on briefly to indicate that
the entire airbag system and the belt tensioners
are operational.
Airbag system malfunction
> Warning lamp does not light up at radio
readiness or beyond.
> Warning lamp remains permanently on.
In the event of a fault in the airbag system,
have it checked without delay, otherwise
there is the risk that the system will not function
as intended even if a sufficiently severe acci-
dent occurs.<
Convertible: rollover
protection system
The rollover protection system is activated
automatically in the event of an accident, a crit-
ical driving situation, an extreme tilt in the car's
longitudinal axis or upon loss of ground contact.
The protection bars behind the rear head
restraints deploy within fractions of a second.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
91
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
As a supplementary system to the reinforced
windshield frame, the rollover protection sys-
tem ensures that the necessary headroom is
maintained for all vehicle occupants.
Always keep the area of movement of the
rollover protection system clear.
In minor accidents, you are protected by the
fastened safety belt and, depending on acci-
dent severity, by the safety belt tensioner and
multi-phase airbag retention system.<
Resetting
If the rollover protection system was not
impacted after being automatically activated, it
can be reset by lowering the protection bars to
their original positions. This does not require
tools.
1. Push the locking lever to one side and hold
it there.
2. Push the protection bar halfway down from
above.
3. Release the locking lever.
4. Push the protection bar down until it snaps
into place.
5. Repeat the procedure for the other protec-
tion bar.
Have the rollover protection system checked
after an unexpected activation.
Never move the convertible top when the
rollover protection system is in the acti-
vated position.
Do not make any modifications to the individual
components of the rollover protection system
or its cabling.
Work on the rollover protection system should
only be performed by a BMW center.
Incorrectly performed work on the system may
lead to system failure or incorrect operation.
To check the system and ensure flawless long-
term operation, always observe the service
intervals, refer to page 72.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Lamps
92
Lamps
Parking lamps/low beams
0 Lamps off,
daytime running lamps
1 Parking lamps and daytime running lamps
2 Low beams,
welcome lamps
*
3 Automatic headlamp control
*
, daytime run-
ning lamps
*
, welcome lamps
*
, Adaptive
Head Light
*
When you open the driver's door with the igni-
tion switched off, the exterior lighting is auto-
matically switched off if the light switch is in
position 0, 2 or 3.
Switch on the parking lamps if necessary,
switch position 1.
Parking lamps
In switch position 1, the front, rear and side
vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the
parking lamps for parking.
The parking lamps will discharge the bat-
tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for
unduly long periods of time, otherwise the bat-
tery might not have enough power to start the
engine. It is preferable to switch on the left-
hand or right-hand roadside parking lamps,
refer to page 94.<
Low-beam headlamps
The low beams light up when the light switch is
in position 2 and the ignition is on.
Automatic headlamp control*
When the switch is in position 3, the low beams
are switched on and off automatically depend-
ing on ambient light conditions, e.g. in a tunnel,
in twilight, or if there is precipitation. The Adap-
tive Head Light
*
is active. The LED next to the
symbol is illuminated when the low beams are
on. You can also activate the daytime running
lamps, refer to page 93. In the situations
described above, the lamps then automatically
switch from daytime running lamps to low
beams.
The headlamps may also come on when the
sun is sitting low on a blue sky.
The low beams remain switched on inde-
pendent of the ambient lighting condi-
tions when you switch on the fog lamps
*
.<
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal
judgment in determining when the lamps
should be switched on in response to ambient
lighting conditions. For example, the system
cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid
safety risks, you should always switch on the
low-beam headlamps manually under these
conditions.<
Welcome lamps
If you leave the light switch in position 2 or 3
when you park the car, the parking lamps and
the interior lamps light up briefly when you
unlock the vehicle.
Activating/deactivating welcome
lamps
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
93
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Lighting" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Welcome light" and press the con-
troller.
The welcome lamps are switched on.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Pathway lighting
If you activate the headlamp flasher after park-
ing the car, with the lamps switched off, the low
beams come on and remain on for a certain
time.
You can adjust the operating period or deacti-
vate the function.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Lighting" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Pathway lighting" and press the
controller.
7. Turn the controller to select the corre-
sponding duration.
8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Daytime running lamps*
The daytime running lamps light up in switch
position 0, 1 and 3. They are less powerful than
the low beams.
Activating/deactivating daytime
running lamps
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Lamps
94
until "Lighting" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Daytime running lamps" and press
the controller.
The daytime running lamps are
switched on.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Adaptive Head Light*
The concept
Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlamp
control system that enables better illumination
of the road surface. Depending on the steering
angle and other parameters, the light from the
headlamp follows the course of the road.
In tight curves at speeds up to 40 mph/70 km/h,
e.g. on mountainous roads or when turning, an
additional, corner-illuminating lamp is switched
on that lights up the inside area of the curve.
Activating Adaptive Head Light
With the ignition switched on, turn the light
switch to position 3, refer to page 92.
The corner-illuminating lamp is switched on
automatically, depending on the steering wheel
angle or turn signal indicator.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive
Head Light directs light towards the front pas-
senger side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
When you are reversing, only the corner-illumi-
nating lamps are active and switched on on
both sides.
Malfunction
The LED next to the symbol for automatic head-
lamp control flashes. Adaptive Head Light is
malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
High beams/roadside parking
lamps*
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Roadside parking lamps
*
Roadside parking lamps, left or right*
There is an additional option of switching on the
lamps on the side of the car facing the road
when parked.
Switching on
After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or
down beyond the pressure point for approx.
1second, arrow 3.
The roadside parking lamps drain the bat-
tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for
unduly long periods of time, otherwise the bat-
tery might not have enough power to start the
engine.<
Switching off
Press the lever in the opposite direction to the
pressure point, arrow 3.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
95
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Fog lamps*
To switch on/off, press the button.
The parking lamps or low beams must
be switched on for the fog lamps to
operate. The green indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster lights up whenever the
fog lamps are on.
The fog lamps are switched off while you acti-
vate the headlamp flasher or switch on the high
beams.
If the automatic headlamp control is acti-
vated, the low beams will come on auto-
matically when you switch on the fog lamps.<
Instrument lighting
You can adjust the brightness of the instrument
lighting only when the parking lamps or the low
beams are switched on.
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the brightness level and the word
"SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Push button 1 up or down to select the
desired brightness level.
4. Press button 2.
The display again shows the outside tem-
perature and the time.
Interior lamps
The interior lamps, footwell lamps
*
, entry
lamps
*
, cargo bay lamp and courtesy lamps
*
are controlled automatically.
The LEDs for the courtesy lamps
are set in the
door handles and illuminate the ground in front
of the doors.
To avoid draining the battery, all lamps
inside the car are switched off about
8 minutes after the ignition is switched off, refer
to Start/stop button on page 58.<
Switching interior lamps on/off
manually
Interior lamps, front and rear
*
:
To switch on and off, press the button.
To switch off the interior lamps, footwell
lamps
*
, entry lamps
*
and courtesy lamps
*
per-
manently, press the button for the front interior
lamps for about 3 seconds.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Lamps
96
Reading lamps
There are reading lamps at the front and rear
*
,
next to the interior lamps. To switch on and off,
press the button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
97
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Climate
1 Airflow directed toward the windshield and
side windows
2 Air to the upper body area:
Draft-free ventilation 100
3 Air to the footwell
4 Air distribution, manual
5 Temperature adjustment, left-hand side of
passenger compartment
6 Maximum cooling
7 AUTO program
8 Air flow rate, manual
9 Display for temperature and air supply
10 Automatic recirculated-air control AUC/
Recirculated-air mode
11 Temperature adjustment, right-hand side
of passenger compartment
12 Residual heat
13 Windows, defrosting and removing con-
densation
14 Switching cooling function on/off manually
15 Rear window defroster
16 Air grill for interior temperature sensor –
please keep clear and unobstructed
The current setting for the air distribution is dis-
played on the Control Display.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Climate
98
Automatic climate control
Comfortable interior climate
The AUTO program 7 offers the ideal air distri-
bution and air flow rate for almost all conditions.
All you need to do is select an interior tempera-
ture which is comfortable for you.
The following sections inform you in detail
about how to adjust the settings.
Most settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile
settings on page 28.
Adjusting air distribution manually
The air distribution can be
switched on and off manually. The
air is directed to the windshield, to
the upper body area and to the
footwell. Automatic air distribution adjustment
is deactivated.
You can switch the automatic air distribution
back on by pressing the AUTO button. This
automatically switches on the cooling function
as well.
Fine adjustments to manual air
distribution
You can set the rate of incoming airflow for
manual air distribution.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Vent settings" and press the con-
troller.
4. Select the desired field.
5. Turn the controller to set the air distribution.
1 Airflow directed toward the windshield and
side windows
2 Air to the upper body area
3 Air to the footwell
Temperature
Set the desired temperatures indi-
vidually for the driver's and front
passenger's sides.
The automatic climate control
achieves this temperature as quickly as possi-
ble regardless of the season, using maximum
cooling or heating power if necessary, and then
maintains it.
When you switch between different tem-
perature settings in quick succession, the
automatic climate control does not have
enough time to achieve the set temperature.<
You can achieve maximum heating power with
the highest setting, regardless of the outside
temperature.
The lowest setting effects continuous cooling.
Maximum cooling
At outside temperatures above
32 7/0 6 and when the engine is
running, you obtain a maximum
cooling effect as soon as possible.
The automatic climate control goes into recir-
culated-air mode at the lowest temperature. Air
flows at maximum rate from the vents for the
upper body area. You should therefore open
them for maximum cooling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
99
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
AUTO program
The AUTO program adjusts the air
distribution to the windshield and
side windows, towards the upper
body area and into the footwell for you. The air
flow rate and your temperature specifications
will be adapted to outside influences as a result
of seasonal changes, e.g. sunlight or window
condensation.
The cooling is switched on automatically with
the AUTO program.
Intensity of the AUTO program
Press the AUTO button repeatedly to set the
intensity of the AUTO program. The current
setting is briefly displayed on the Control Dis-
play every time the button is pressed.
You can also set the intensity of the AUTO pro-
gram via iDrive.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Call up "Climate".
3. Select "Automatic programs" and press the
controller.
4. Select the desired field.
5. Press the controller to set the desired inten-
sity.
The selected intensity level of the auto-
matic program is switched on.
Convertible program
When the convertible top is down, the Convert-
ible program becomes available for selection. In
the Convertible program, the automatic climate
control is optimized for driving with the convert-
ible top down. In addition, the air flow rate is
increased as vehicle speed increases.
When the Convertible program has been
selected, it is automatically activated every time
the convertible top is opened.
The effectiveness of the Convertible pro-
gram can be enhanced considerably by
installing the wind deflector.<
Adjusting air flow rate manually
Press the left side of the button to
reduce airflow. Press the right side
of the button to increase it. You can
reactivate the automatic mode for the air flow
rate with the AUTO button.
The air flow rate may be reduced or the blower
may be switched off entirely to save on battery
power. The display remains the same.
Switching the system on/off
With the blower at its lowest setting, press the
left side of the button to switch off the auto-
matic climate control. All displays are cleared
except for the rear window defroster if it is
switched on.
Press any button except REST or rear window
defroster to reactivate the automatic climate
control.
Automatic recirculated-air control
AUC/Recirculated-air mode
Switch on the desired operating
mode by pressing this button
repeatedly:
> LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
> Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: a sensor
detects pollutants in the outside air. If nec-
essary, the system blocks the supply of out-
side air and recirculates the inside air. As
soon as the concentration of pollutants in
the outside air has decreased sufficiently,
the system automatically switches back to
outside air supply.
> Right-hand LED on, recirculated-air mode:
the supply of outside air is permanently
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Climate
100
shut off. The system then recirculates the
air currently within the vehicle.
If condensation starts to form on the
inside window surfaces during operation
in the recirculated-air mode, you should switch
it off while also increasing the air flow rate as
required.
The recirculated-air mode should not be used
continuously for lengthy periods, otherwise the
quality of the air inside the car will gradually
deteriorate.<
Via the button* on the steering wheel
You can use an individually programmable but-
ton on the steering wheel, refer to page 53, to
select between the different modes.
Residual heat
The heat stored in the engine is
used to heat the passenger com-
partment, e.g. while stopped at a
school to pick up a child.
The function can be switched on when the fol-
lowing conditions are met:
> Up to 15 minutes after the engine has been
switched off
> While the engine is at operating tempera-
ture
> As long as battery voltage is sufficient
> At an outside temperature below 77 7/
25 6
The LED is lit when the function is on.
As of radio readiness, you can set the interior
temperature, air flow rate and air distribution.
Windows, defrosting and removing
condensation
Quickly removes ice and conden-
sation from the windshield and
front side windows.
Switch on the cooling function as well.
Switching cooling function on/off
The cooling function cools and
dehumidifies the incoming air
before reheating it as required,
according to the temperature setting. This
function is only available while the engine is
running.
The cooling function helps prevent condensa-
tion on the windows or removes it quickly.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog over briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is automatically switched
on along with the AUTO program.
Rear window defroster
The defroster is switched off auto-
matically after a certain time.
Depending on your vehicle's
equipment, the upper wires serve
as an antenna and are not part of the rear win-
dow defroster.
Ventilation
1 Use the knurled wheels to smoothly open
and close the air vents
2 Use the lever to change the direction of the
airflow
Ventilation for cooling
Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool
air in your direction, for instance if it has become
too hot in the car.
Draft-free ventilation
Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past
you and not straight at you.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
101
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the
incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter pro-
vides additional protection by filtering gaseous
pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW cen-
ter replaces this combined filter during routine
maintenance.
Parked car ventilation*
The concept
The parked car ventilation provides ventilation
to the passenger compartment and lowers its
temperature, if necessary.
The parked car ventilation system is operated
via iDrive, refer to page 16. Two different
switch-on times can be preselected.
The parked car ventilation remains switched on
for 30 minutes. The system can also be
switched on and off directly. Due to its high
power consumption, it should not be switched
on twice in a row without driving in between to
allow the battery to recharge.
The parked car ventilation system comes on if
the outside temperature is above 59 7/15 6
when the switch-on time was preselected, but
is ready for use at any temperature when the
system is switched on directly.
The air emerges from the air vents for the upper
body area in the instrument panel. The air vents
must therefore be open.
Switching on/off directly
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Automatic ventilation" and press
the controller.
5. Select "Parked car ventilation" and press
the controller.
If the symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control is flashing, parked car ventila-
tion is switched on.
Preselecting switch-on times
1. Call up "Climate".
2. Select "Parked car operation" and press the
controller.
3. Select "Activation time" and press the con-
troller.
Two consecutive switch-on times
must be at least 31 minutes apart.<
4. Move the controller to the left or right to
select "Timer 1" or "Timer 2".
5. Select the time and press the controller.
The hours setting is selected.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Climate
102
6. Turn the controller to set the hours.
7. Press the controller to select the minutes
setting.
8. Turn the controller to set the minutes.
Activating switch-on times
Move the controller to the left or right to select
"Timer 1" or "Timer 2" and press the controller.
The switch-on time is activated.
The symbol on the automatic climate control
display lights up.
The symbol on the automatic climate control
display flashes when the system has switched
on.
The parked car ventilation system is
switched on within the next 24 hours only.
After that, the time setting must be reacti-
vated.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
103
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Practical interior accessories
Integrated universal remote
control*
The concept
The integrated universal remote control can
replace as many as three hand-held transmit-
ters for various remote-controlled devices,
such as garage doors and gates or lighting sys-
tems. The integrated universal remote control
registers and stores signals from the original
hand-held transmitters.
The signal of an original hand-held transmitter
can be programmed on one of the three mem-
ory buttons 1. After this, the programmed
memory button 1 will operate the system in
question. The LED 2 flashes to confirm trans-
mission of the signal.
Should you sell your vehicle one day, be sure to
delete the stored programs beforehand for your
safety, refer to page 104.
To prevent possible damage or injury,
before programming or using the inte-
grated universal remote control, always inspect
the immediate area to make certain that no peo-
ple, animals or objects are within the pivoting or
travel range of the device being operated. Com-
ply also with the safety instructions supplied
with the original hand-held transmitter.<
Checking compatibility
If this symbol appears on the package
or in the instructions supplied with the
original hand-held transmitter, you can
assume that the radio remote control device will
be compatible with the integrated universal
remote control.
For additional information, please contact your
BMW center or call: 1-800-355-3515.
You can also obtain information on the Internet
at:
www.bmwusa.com or
www.homelink.com.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls, Inc.
Programming
1 Memory buttons
2 LED
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 58.
2. When starting operation for the first time:
press the left and right memory buttons 1
for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2
flashes rapidly. The three memory buttons
are cleared.
3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a
distance of approx. 4 to 12 in/10 to 30 cm
from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the system of the
respective original hand-held transmitter
used.<
4. Simultaneously press the transmit key on
the original hand-held transmitter and the
desired memory button 1 on the integrated
universal remote control. The LED 2 flashes
slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2 flashes
rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2
does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 sec-
onds, alter the distance and repeat this
step.
5. To program other original hand-held trans-
mitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
104
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
You can operate the device while the ignition is
switched off.
If the device fails to function even after
repeated programming, check whether
the original hand-held transmitter uses an alter-
nating-code system. To do so, either read the
instructions for the original hand-held transmit-
ter or hold down the programmed memory
button 1 of the integrated universal remote
control. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal
remote control flashes rapidly and then remains
lit for about two seconds, the original hand-held
transmitter uses an alternating-code system. If
it uses an alternating-code system, program
the memory buttons 1 as described under
Alternating-code hand-held transmitters.<
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitters
To program the integrated universal remote
control, consult the operating instructions for
the device to be set. You will find information
there on the possibilities for synchronization.
When programming hand-held transmitters
that employ an alternating code, please observe
the following supplementary instructions:
Programming will be easier with the aid of
a second person.<
1. Park your vehicle within the range of the
remote-controlled device.
2. Program the integrated universal remote
control as described above in the section
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.
3. Locate the button on the receiver of the
device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.
4. Press the button on the receiver of the
device to be set. After step 4, you have
approx. 30 seconds for step 5.
5. Press the programmed memory button 1 of
the integrated universal remote control
three times.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
If you have any questions, please contact
your BMW center.<
Deleting all stored programs
Press the left and right memory buttons 1 for
approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes rap-
idly: all stored programs are deleted.
Reassigning individual programs
1. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a
distance of approx. 4 to 12 in/10 to 30 cm
from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the system of the
respective original hand-held transmitter
used.<
2. Press the desired memory button 1 of the
integrated universal remote control.
3. If the LED 2 flashes slowly after approx.
20 seconds, press the transmit key of the
original hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons as soon as the LED 2 flashes
rapidly. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly
after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance
and repeat this step.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
105
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Digital compass*
1 Adjustment button
2 Display
The display shows you the main or secondary
compass direction in which you are driving.
Operating principle
You can call up various functions by pressing
the adjustment button with a pointed object
such as a pen or similar item. The following
adjustment options are displayed one after the
other, depending on how long you keep the
adjustment button pressed:
> Press briefly: switch display on/off
> 3 to 6 seconds: set the compass zone
> 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the compass
> 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right-hand
steering
> 12 to 15 seconds: set the language
Setting compass zones
Set the compass zone corresponding to your
vehicle's geographic location so that the com-
pass can function correctly; refer to the world
map with compass zones.
To set the compass zone, press the adjustment
button for approx. 3-4 seconds. The number of
the compass zone set is shown in the display.
To change the zone setting, briefly press the
adjustment button repeatedly until the display
shows the number of the compass zone corre-
sponding to your current location.
The compass is operational again after approx.
10 seconds.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
106
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
following situations:
> An incorrect compass direction is shown.
> The compass direction shown does not
change although the direction of travel
does.
> Not all compass directions are shown.
Procedure
1. Make sure that no large metal objects or
overhead power lines are in the vicinity of
your vehicle and that you have enough
space to drive in a circle.
2. Set the currently valid compass zone.
3. Press the adjustment button for approx.
6-7 seconds to call up C. Then drive in at
least one full circle at a speed of no more
than 4mph or 7km/h.
If calibration is successful, the display
changes from C to a compass direction.
Setting right-hand/left-hand steering
Your digital compass is factory-set to right-
hand or left-hand steering, in accordance with
your vehicle.
Setting the language
You can set the language of the display:
Press the adjustment button for approx.
12-13 seconds. Briefly press the adjustment
button again to switch between English, "E",
and German, "O".
The setting is automatically saved after approx.
10 seconds.
Glove compartment
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment comes on.
To prevent injury in the event of an acci-
dent while the vehicle is being driven,
close the glove compartment immediately after
use.<
Closing
Fold cover up.
Locking
To lock the glove compartment, use the inte-
grated key of the remote control, refer to
page 28.
LED hand lamp
Coupe
The LED hand lamp is stored in the glove com-
partment.
Convertible
The LED hand lamp is located in a holder inside
the glove compartment on the left side.
Insert the hand lamp into the holder with
the lens pointing toward the passenger
compartment to ensure that the lamp cannot be
switched on accidentally.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
107
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Center armrest
Storage compartment
The center armrest between the front seats
contains a credit card holder and, depending on
the equipment version, a compartment or a
snap-in adapter
*
.
Opening
Press the button, see arrow.
Connection for external audio
device
You can connect an external audio device such
as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks
over the car's loudspeaker system:
> AUX-In port, refer to page 169
> USB-audio interface, refer to page 170
Storage compartments inside
the vehicle
Compartments are located next to the steering
column
*
, on the doors and in the center con-
sole.
There are nets
*
on the front-seat backrests.
Coupe: clothes hooks
There are clothes hooks in the rear.
Items of clothing hung from the hooks
must not obstruct the driver's view. Do
not hang heavy objects from the hooks, other-
wise they could endanger the car's occupants,
e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerv-
ing.<
Cup holders
Use lightweight and shatterproof contain-
ers and do not transport hot beverages,
otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in
the event of the accident. Do not force contain-
ers that are too large into the cup holders, oth-
erwise damage could result.<
There is one cup holder in the center console.
You can mount an attachable cup holder
*
on
the side of the center console.
Ashtray*
Opening
Push the ridge on the cover.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
108
Emptying
Lift out the insert.
Lighter
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, press in the cigarette lighter.
The lighter can be pulled out as soon as it pops
back out.
Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by
the knob only. Holding or touching it in
other areas could result in burns.
When leaving the car, always remove the
remote control so that children cannot operate
the cigarette lighter and burn themselves.<
Connecting electrical
appliances
In your BMW, when the engine is running or the
ignition is switched on, you can use electrical
devices such as a hand lamp, car vacuum
cleaner, etc., up to approx. 200 watts at
12 volts, as long as one of the following sockets
is available. Avoid damaging the socket by
attempting to insert plugs of unsuitable shape
or size.
Cigarette lighter socket*
To access the socket:
Open the ashtray at the front and pull out the
lighter to use the socket.
In the cargo bay*
To access the socket:
Fold open the cover.
In the center console
To access the socket, refer to AUX-In port on
page 169.
Coupe: through-loading
system
Opening
1. To release the rear seat backrest, pull the
corresponding lever in the cargo bay.
2. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves for-
ward slightly. Fold the backrest forward by
the head restraint.
Closing
Return the rear seat backrest to its upright posi-
tion and engage it.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
109
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
When returning the backrest into its seat-
ing position, make sure that the seat's
locking mechanism is properly engaged. Other-
wise, cargo could be thrown around in the event
of sharp braking or swerving and endanger the
occupants.<
The lashing eyes in the cargo bay provide you
with a way to attach cargo bay nets
*
or draw
straps for securing suitcases and luggage, refer
to page 117.
Convertible: cargo loading
Enlarging the cargo bay
When the convertible top is closed you can
enlarge the cargo bay:
To do so, fold the cargo bay partition upward.
Before opening the convertible top, pull the
cargo bay partition down until it engages.
Ensure that pointed objects do not press
against the cargo bay partition from below.
The convertible top can only be opened
when the cargo bay partition is folded
down.<
Storage compartments inside
the cargo bay
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
following storage spaces can be found in the
cargo bay:
> Rubber strap on the left trim panel for
securing small objects such as a folding
umbrella
> Net for small objects on the right trim panel
of the cargo bay
> Retaining straps
*
on cargo bay floor: for
securing smaller objects or as an anti-slip
surface when you place objects on the
straps
The lashing eyes in the cargo bay provide you
with a way to attach cargo bay nets
*
or draw
straps
*
for securing suitcases and luggage,
refer to page 118.
Coupe: ski bag*
The ski bag is designed for safe, clean transport
of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to
2snowboards.
With the ski bag you can stow skis with a length
of up to 6.6ft/2.0m. When skis of 6.6ft/2.0m
length are loaded, the overall capacity of the ski
bag is reduced due to its tapered design.
Loading
Ensure that the skis are clean when they are
loaded into the ski bag. Wrap sharp edges to
prevent damage.
1. Fold down the center panel in the rear seat
backrest.
2. Press the button, reach into the recess and
fold down the cover. To stabilize the cover
in the folded-down position, place the cen-
ter panel underneath it.
3. Open the Velcro fastener, spread the ski
bag between the front seats and insert the
skis or snowboards.
The zip fastener makes objects in the ski
bag easier to reach.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
110
4. Attach the hook of the ski bag retaining
strap to the eyelet on the side of the ski bag
opening.
Securing cargo
After loading, secure the ski bag and its con-
tents. Tighten the retaining strap on the ten-
sioning buckle for this purpose.
Secure the ski bag in the manner
described, otherwise it could endanger
the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy brak-
ing or sudden swerving.<
To store the ski bag, perform the steps
described for loading in reverse order.
Removing the ski bag
The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g. for
faster drying or to allow you to use other inserts.
1. Fold down the center panel in the rear seat
backrest.
2. Pull the handle, arrow 1.
3. Pull out the insert, arrow 2.
For more information on the various
inserts available, contact your BMW cen-
ter.<
Convertible: through-loading
opening with integrated
transport bag*
The transport bag is designed for safe, clean
transport of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up
to 2 snowboards.
With the transport bag you can stow skis up to a
length of 6.6 ft /2.0 m. When skis of 6.6 ft/2.0 m
length are loaded, the overall capacity of the ski
bag is reduced due to its tapered design.
When using the transport bag, it is not
permissible to transport passengers in
the rear seats.<
Loading
1. Pull the grip in the filler piece of the rear
backrest up and take out the filler piece.
2. Place the filler piece onto the seat cushion
with the backrest side facing up.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
111
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
3. In the cargo bay: press the two recesses
together and fold down the cover.
4. Release the strap, lay out the transport bag
between the front seats and load it.
The zip fastener makes objects in the ski
bag easier to reach.
Ensure that the skis are clean when you load
them into the transport bag. Wrap sharp edges
to prevent damage.
Securing cargo
After loading, secure the transport bag and its
contents. Tighten the retaining strap on the
tensioning buckle for this purpose.
Secure the transport bag in the manner
described, otherwise it could endanger
the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy brak-
ing or sudden swerving.<
To store the transport bag, perform the steps
described for loading in reverse order.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Driving tips
This section provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating conditions.
Driving tips
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
114
Things to remember when driving
Break-in period
Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to
each other. Please follow the instructions below
in order to achieve the optimal service life and
economy of operation for your vehicle.
Engine and differential
Always obey all official speed limits.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but do
not exceed an engine speed of 4500 rpm or a
road speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kick-down mode.
After driving 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Engine and vehicle speeds can be gradually
increased.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac-
tion potential until after an initial break-in
period. Therefore, drive cautiously during the
first 200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of
approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in
period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
level only after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be
observed if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
Saving fuel
The fuel consumption of your vehicle depends
on several factors. You can lower fuel consump-
tion and the environmental impact by taking
certain measures, adjusting your driving style
and having the vehicle serviced regularly.
Remove any unneeded cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove any mounted parts after you
have finished using them
Remove unneeded additional mirrors, the roof
rack and the rear luggage rack after use.
Mounted parts affect the vehicle's aerodynam-
ics and increase fuel consumption.
Close the windows and glass roof
An open glass roof or window causes higher air
resistance and thus increases fuel consump-
tion.
Check tire inflation pressure regularly
Check the tire inflation pressure at least twice a
month and before embarking on a long journey,
and correct it if necessary.
Low tire inflation pressure causes higher rolling
resistance and thus increases fuel consumption
and tire wear.
Set off immediately
Do not let the engine warm up while the car is
still standing, but set off immediately at moder-
ate engine speed. This is the fastest way for the
cold engine to reach its operating temperature.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Driving tips
115
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Drive defensively
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking
maneuvers. To do so, keep an adequate dis-
tance to the forward vehicle. A defensive and
smooth driving style keeps fuel consumption
down.
Avoid high engine speeds
Only use first gear when setting off. In second
and higher gears, accelerate without hesitation
or pauses. When accelerating, shift up before
reaching high engine speeds.
When you reach the desired speed, shift into
the highest applicable gear and drive with the
engine speed as low as possible and at a con-
stant speed.
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Coasting
When approaching a red light, take your foot off
the accelerator and coast to a stop in the high-
est applicable gear.
On a downhill slope, take your foot off the accel-
erator and coast in a suitable gear.
The fuel supply is interrupted when coasting.
Switch off the engine during lengthy
stops
Switch off the engine when stopping for lengthy
periods, e.g. at traffic lights, railroad crossings
or in traffic congestions. You achieve fuel sav-
ings even if standing time is as short as approx.
4 seconds.
Switch off functions you do not need at
the moment
Functions such as the air conditioner and the
seat or rear window heating draw large amounts
of power and consume additional fuel. Espe-
cially in city traffic and in stop-and-go driving
they have a considerable impact. Therefore,
switch these functions off when they are not
really needed.
Have the vehicle serviced
Have the vehicle serviced regularly to achieve
good economy and a long vehicle life. BMW
recommends having the vehicle serviced at a
BMW center. Also note the BMW service sys-
tem, refer to page 217.
General driving notes
Close the luggage compartment lid
Operate the vehicle only when the lug-
gage compartment lid is closed. Other-
wise, exhaust fumes could enter the interior of
the vehicle.<
If the vehicle must be driven with the luggage
compartment lid open:
1. Close all windows and the glass roof.
2. Greatly increase the air volume of the auto-
matic climate control system, refer to
page 99.
Hot exhaust system
In all vehicles, extremely high tempera-
tures are generated in the exhaust sys-
tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed in
its vicinity, and never apply undercoating to
them. When driving, standing at idle and while
parking, take care to avoid possible contact
between the hot exhaust system and any highly
flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass,
etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, with the
risk of serious personal injuries and property
damage. Do not touch hot exhaust tail pipes.
Otherwise there is a risk of burns.<
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads,
reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge
of water can form between tires and road sur-
face. This situation, known as hydroplaning,
means that the tire can completely lose contact
with the road surface, so that neither the car can
be steered nor the brake be properly applied.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
116
The risk of hydroplaning increases with declin-
ing tread depth on the tires, refer also to Mini-
mum tread depth on page 209.
Driving through water
Drive through water on the road only if it is
not deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only
at walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the
vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the
transmission may be damaged.<
Use the parking brake on inclines
On inclines, do not hold the vehicle for a
lengthy period using the clutch; use the
parking brake instead. Otherwise greater clutch
wear will result.<
For more information about the drive-off assis-
tant, refer to page 83.
Braking safely
Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most
effective way of braking in situations in which
this is necessary. Since the vehicle maintains
steering responsiveness, you can still avoid
possible obstacles with a minimum of steering
effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal, combined with
sounds from the hydraulic circuits, indicate that
ABS is in its active mode.
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain,
briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal
every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to
ensure that this maneuver does not endanger
other road users. The heat generated in this
process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure
that full braking efficiency will then be available
when you need it.
Hills
To prevent overheating and the resulting
reduced efficiency of the brake system,
drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear in which the least braking is required. Even
light but consistent brake pressure can lead to
high temperatures, brake wear and possibly
even brake failure.<
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down, all the way to first gear if neces-
sary. This strategy helps you avoid placing
excessive loads on the brake system. Down-
shifting in manual mode of the automatic trans-
mission, refer to page 61.
Never drive with the clutch held down,
with the transmission in neutral or with
the engine switched off; otherwise, engine
braking action will not be present or there will be
no power assistance to the brakes or steering.
Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other
objects to protrude into the area around the
pedals, otherwise pedal function could be
impaired.<
Corrosion on brake rotors
When the vehicle is driven only occasionally,
during extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all, and in operating conditions where
brake applications are less frequent, there is an
increased tendency for corrosion to form on
rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the
brake pads. This occurs because the minimum
pressure which must be exerted by the pads
during brake applications to clean the rotors is
not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating
effect that even extended application will fail to
cure.
When the vehicle is parked
Condensation forms while the automatic cli-
mate control is in operation, and then exits
under the vehicle. Traces of condensed water
under the vehicle are therefore normal.
Before driving into a car wash
General information on caring for your BMW
can be found on page 219.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Driving tips
117
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
With convenient access and automatic
transmission
Insert the remote control into the ignition
switch.
The engine can be switched off when the selec-
tor lever is in position N. Refer also to page 37.
Cargo loading
To avoid loading the tires beyond their
approved carrying capacity, never over-
load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over-
heating and increases the rate at which damage
develops inside the tires. This can ultimately
result in a sudden blow-out.<
Make sure that no liquids are spilled or
leak from their containers in the cargo
bay, as this could result in damage to the vehi-
cle.<
Determining loading limit
1. Locate the following statement on your
vehicle's placard
*
:
The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, overloading
can result in damage to the vehicle and
unstable driving conditions.<
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY
pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150-lb. pas-
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs:
1,400 lbs. minus 750 lbs. = 650 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of
the load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult the manual for
transporting a trailer to determine how this
may reduce the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Load
The permissible load is the total of the weight of
occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the
weight of the occupants, the less cargo/lug-
gage can be transported.
Stowing cargo
Coupe
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
118
Convertible
> Position heavy objects as low and as far for-
ward as possible, ideally directly behind the
respective seat backrests.
> Cover sharp edges and corners.
> For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is
not occupied, secure each safety belt in the
opposite buckle.
Securing cargo
> Secure smaller and lighter items using
retaining straps, a cargo bay net
*
or draw
straps
*
.
> Heavy-duty cargo straps
*
for securing
larger and heavier objects are available at
your BMW center. To attach the cargo
straps, there are two lashing eyes, arrows 1,
on the inside wall of the cargo bay. Depend-
ing on your vehicle's equipment, there may
be two additional lashing eyes, arrows 2, on
the cargo bay sidewalls.
Follow the information included with the
cargo straps.
Always position and secure the cargo as
described above, so that it cannot endan-
ger the car's occupants, for example if sudden
braking or swerving is necessary.
Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle
weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer
to page 239, as excessive loads can pose a
safety hazard, and may also place you in viola-
tion of traffic safety laws.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried
loose inside the car, since they could be thrown
around, for example as a result of heavy braking,
sudden swerves, etc., and endanger the occu-
pants.
Only attach the cargo straps using the lashing
eyes shown in the illustration. Do not secure
cargo with the anchors for tether straps, refer to
page 56, otherwise these could be damaged.<
Coupe: roof-mounted
luggage rack*
A special rack system is available as an option
for your BMW. Comply with the directions given
in the installation instructions.
Mounting points
Fold open the cover.
Loading roof-mounted luggage rack
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on
vehicle handling and steering response.
You should therefore always remember not to
exceed the approved roof load capacity, the
approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads
when loading the rack.
You can find the applicable data under Weights
on page 239.
The roof load must be distributed uniformly and
should not be too large in area. Heavy items
should always be placed at the bottom. Be sure
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Driving tips
119
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
that adequate clearance is maintained for rais-
ing the glass roof, and that objects do not
project into the opening path of the luggage
compartment lid.
Fasten roof-mounted cargo correctly and
securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off
during the trip.
Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and
braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.
Rear-mounted luggage rack*
A rear-mounted luggage rack is available as a
special accessory for your BMW. Comply with
the directions given in the installation instruc-
tions.
Mounting points
The mounting points are located under the pro-
tective covers in the bumper.
Loading the rear-mounted luggage
rack
You should always remember not to exceed the
approved roof load capacity, the approved
gross vehicle weight or the axle loads when
loading the rack.
You can find the applicable data under Weights
on page 239.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Navigation
This chapter describes how you can
enter destinations and specify your route
so that your navigation system guides you
reliably to your destination.
Navigation
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Starting the navigation system
122
Starting the navigation system
Your navigation system can use satellites to
ascertain the precise position of your vehicle
and guide you reliably to any destination you
enter.
Navigation DVD
The navigation system requires a special navi-
gation DVD. You can obtain the latest version at
your BMW center.
Inserting navigation DVD
Use the lower drive for navigation DVDs.
1. Insert the navigation DVD with the labeled
side up.
The navigation DVD is pulled in automati-
cally.
2. Wait for several seconds to allow the con-
tents of the DVD to be read in.
Removing navigation DVD
1. Press button 1.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
2. Remove the DVD.
If the DVD is not ejected, the drive may be
blocked. In this case, a message will appear on
the Control Display.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
123
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Destination entry
In entering your destination you can select from
the following options:
> Entering a destination manually, see below
> Entering a destination by voice com-
mands*, refer to page 127
> Selecting destination using information,
refer to page 129
> Selecting destination from a list, refer to
Destination list, page 130
> Selecting destination from address book,
refer to page 131
> Selecting home address, refer to page 133
After selecting your destination you can pro-
ceed to start the destination guidance, refer to
page 136.
You can also store a navigation destination on
the programmable memory keys, refer to
page 21.
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta-
tionary, and always give priority to the
applicable traffic regulations in the event of any
contradiction between traffic and road condi-
tions and the instructions issued by the naviga-
tion system. Otherwise, vehicle occupants and
other road users may be endangered.<
Opening navigation
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to call up
"Navigation".
3. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
The following is displayed on the Control Dis-
play:
> The arrow or map view during destination
guidance
> The destination list when destination guid-
ance is switched off
Entering a destination
manually
The system's word-matching principle makes it
easier for you to enter the names of streets or
towns, refer to page 135. This allows you to
enter different spellings and completes your
entry automatically so that stored names can be
called up quickly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Destination entry
124
1. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Navigation" is selected and press the
controller.
"New destination" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select "Enter address" and press the con-
troller.
The system also supports you with the follow-
ing features:
> If you do not enter a street, the system will
guide you to the downtown area of a town or
city.
> You can skip the entry of country and local-
ity if the current entries should be retained
for your new destination.
Selecting country
1. Select "State / Province" or the country dis-
played and press the controller.
The list of available countries appears on
the display.
2. Select the country of destination and press
the controller.
At least the town/city of the destination or its zip
code must be entered in order to start the des-
tination guidance.
Entering destination by town/city name
1. Select "Town / City" or the town/city dis-
played and press the controller.
2. Select the starting letter and press the con-
troller.
A list of all towns/cities starting with this let-
ter appears on the Control Display.
3. Delete letters, if necessary:
> To delete individual numbers or letters:
Move the controller towards the right to
select , and press the controller.
> To delete all numbers or letters:
Move the controller toward the right to
select , and press the controller for
a longer period.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
125
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
4. If necessary, enter more letters.
The list gradually grows smaller each time
you enter a new letter.
> To enter spaces, if necessary:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the third field from the top. Turn the control-
ler until the city or town name is selected
from the list and press the controller.
Entering destination by zip code
1. Select "Town / City" and press the control-
ler.
2. Enter the zip code:
Select the desired digits and press the con-
troller.
> To enter spaces:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.
> To delete individual numbers or letters:
Move the controller towards the right to
select , and press the controller.
> To delete all numbers or letters:
Move the controller toward the right to
select , and press the controller for
a longer period.
3. Select the zip code and press the controller.
The corresponding destination is displayed.
4. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the controller until the
destination is selected and press the con-
troller.
Entering street, house number and
intersection
After the street you can also enter the intersec-
tion or the house number.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Destination entry
126
Entering street and intersection
1. Select "Street" or the street displayed and
press the controller.
2. Enter the street.
The street is entered in the same manner as
the town or city.
The intersection is entered in the same way as
the street.
Entering a street without entering a
town/city
You can also enter a street without specifying a
town/city. In this case, all streets of the same
name in the designated country are offered.
The corresponding town/city is displayed after
the street name.
If a town/city has already been entered, you can
negate this entry. This could be helpful in
instances where the desired street does not
exist in the entered town/city because it
belongs to another suburb, for example.
1. Move the highlight marker to the uppermost
field.
The arrow is selected.
2. Turn the controller to the right until you see
a request to enter a street in the country,
then press the controller.
3. Switch to the second field from the top and
enter the street.
Entering a house number
You can enter any house number stored for the
street on the navigation DVD.
1. Select "House number" and press the con-
troller.
2. To enter the house number:
Select the desired digits and press the con-
troller.
3. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the controller until the
house number is selected and press the
controller.
Starting destination guidance with
manual destination entry
> Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
Destination guidance starts immediately.
> If you do not want to start destination guid-
ance right away:
Select "Add to destination list" and press
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
127
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
the controller.
The destination is stored in the destination
list, refer to page 130.
Entering a destination by
voice commands*
You can enter a desired destination via the
voice command system. During the destination
input, you can switch between voice entry and
entry via iDrive at any time. To do so, reactivate
the voice command system if necessary.
You can have the possible commands
read aloud via {Options}.<
1. Press the button on the steering wheel
or in the center console.
Selecting country
1. Wait for the system to ask for the country of
destination.
Say the name of the destination country in the
language of the voice command system.
Entering a destination
The destination can be spelled or entered as an
entire word.
Spelling the destination
To enter a destination, spell it in the way it is
commonly spelled in the destination country.
Pronounce the letters smoothly and at normal
volume, avoiding excessive emphases and
pauses.
The system can suggest up to 20 destina-
tions that meet your entries. Up to 6 entries
at a time appear on the Control Display.
The town/city can also be selected from the list
via iDrive:
Turn the controller until the destination is
selected and press the controller.
Entering the destination as an entire
word*
The names of towns/cities and streets located
in the region in which the language of the voice
command system is spoken can be entered as
an entire word.
Example: to enter a U.S. destination as an entire
word, the system language must be English.
Speak smoothly and at normal volume, and
avoid excessive emphases and pauses.
2. {Enter address}
2. Say the name of the destination coun-
try.
1. To spell the name of a town/city:
Say at least the first three letters of the
town/city. The more letters you say, the
more accurately the system will recog-
nize the town/city.
The system suggests a location.
2. Select location:
> To select highlighted town/city:
{Yes}
> To select other town/city: {No}
> To select an entry, e.g. {Entry 3}
> To show other entries in the list:
{Next page}
> To respell the town/city: {Repeat}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Destination entry
128
1. Wait for the system to ask for the town/city
of destination.
The system can suggest up to 6 destina-
tions that fit your entries.
The town/city can also be selected from the list
via iDrive:
Turn the controller until the destination is
selected and press the controller.
Identical-sounding towns/cities that can-
not be distinguished by the system are
compiled in a separate list and shown as a des-
tination followed by three dots.
If applicable, select this entry with {Yes}. Then
select the desired town/city from that list.<
Entering street and house number
The street is entered in the same way as the
destination town/city.
To enter the house number:
House numbers of up to 4 digits can be entered.
Say the house number as individual digits.
Starting destination guidance
Destination guidance starts immediately.
Storing destinations
Destinations are added to the destination list or
can be stored in the address book.
Map-guided destination
selection
If you only know the location of the town or
street of destination, you can enter the destina-
tion using a map. You can use the cross-hairs to
select the destination on the map and then
transfer it for destination guidance.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
"New destination" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select "Input map" and press the controller.
2. Say the name of the destination town/
city.
The system suggests a location.
3. Select location:
> To select highlighted town/city:
{Yes}
> To select other town/city: {No}
> To select an entry, e.g. {Entry 3}
> To re-enter the town/city: {Repeat}
> To enter the town/city by spelling:
{Spell}
1. {House number}
2. Say the house number.
{Start guidance}
{Add to destination list} or
{Add to address book}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
129
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
A section of a map is displayed on the Con-
trol Display:
> During destination guidance, around the
current destination
> With the destination guidance deacti-
vated, around the last destination
entered
4. Select the destination with the cross-hairs.
> To change the scale: turn the controller.
> To move the map: move the controller in
the desired direction.
The controller can be moved to the left,
right, forwards and backwards.
5. Press the controller to transfer the destina-
tion for destination guidance or to store it.
The selected destination and other menu
items are displayed.
6. Select the desired menu item:
> "Start route guidance" starts destination
guidance.
> "Show current position" places your
current position at the center of the map.
> "Show destination position" places the
current destination at the center of the
map.
> "Return to map" changes back to the
"Input map".
> Exit the menu.
7. Press the controller.
The map for destination entry can also be called
up in the map display:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
Selecting destination using
information
You can have a list of selected destinations dis-
played, e.g. hotels, sights or hospitals, and
transfer them for destination guidance.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Select "Information" and press the control-
ler.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Destination entry
130
3. Select location:
> "On destination"
> "On location"
> "On a new destination"
4. Press the controller.
5. Make your selection, e.g. "Hotels and res-
taurants", and press the controller.
6. Enter search criteria if necessary, e.g. the
maximum distance from your location.
7. Select "<Start search>" and press the con-
troller.
Destinations are shown on the Control Dis-
play.
8. Select a destination and press the control-
ler.
The scope of information and sym-
bols depends on the particular navi-
gation DVD you are using.<
9. Select the desired menu item:
> To transfer the address to the destina-
tion list and start destination guidance:
Select the symbol and press the
controller.
> To establish a telephone connection:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.
> To display additional destinations:
Select the symbol and press the
controller.
> To start a new search:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Symbols in the map display
If you select the hotel category, for example,
and start a search, hotels appear on the map as
symbols.
To hide the symbols in the map display:
1. Select the symbol and press the control-
ler.
2. Select "Hide map icons" and press the con-
troller.
The symbols are hidden.
To show the symbols:
Select "Show map icons" and press the con-
troller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Destination list
The last 20 destinations entered into the sys-
tem are shown in the destination list. You can
call up these destinations and transfer them for
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
131
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
destination guidance.
If you are planning a longer journey, for exam-
ple, you can store all the destinations you wish
to drive to in the destination list in advance,
refer to Entering a destination manually on
page 123.
Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
The destination last entered is listed first in the
destination list.
This symbol identifies the current destina-
tion during destination guidance.
To show other destinations in the destination
list:
Turn the controller.
Transferring destination for
destination guidance
1. Select the desired destination from the des-
tination list and press the controller.
2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
Editing destination list
1. Select the desired destination from the des-
tination list and press the controller.
2. The selected destination can be edited:
> To store the entry:
Select "Add to address book".
> To display information on the destina-
tion:
Select "Information on destination".
> To delete the entry:
Select "Delete entry".
> To delete all entries:
Select "Delete list". The destination
guidance is switched off.
> To change an entry:
Select "Edit". For operation, refer to
Entering destination by town/city name,
page 124.
3. Press the controller.
Address book
Opening address book
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
Select "Address book" and press the controller.
Storing destinations in address book
You can store approx. 100 destinations in the
address book.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Destination entry
132
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "New address" and press the con-
troller.
3. Select "Enter address" and press the con-
troller.
4. Enter the name and address, refer also to
Entering a destination manually, page 123.
5. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
The entry is stored in the address book.
You can also store a destination from the desti-
nation list in the address book, refer to
page 130.
Storing current position*
The current position can be transferred to the
address book.
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the controller until "New
address" is selected and press the control-
ler.
3. Select "Use current location as address"
and press the controller.
The name given can be changed. For oper-
ation, refer to Entering a destination manu-
ally, page 123.
4. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
You can also enter your current position into the
address book if you have left the area covered
by the navigation DVD. In this case, you must
enter a name.
Selecting destinations from address
book
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
The stored entries appear on the Control
Display.
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
To start destination guidance:
Select "Start guidance" and press the control-
ler.
Changing destinations from address
book
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
133
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
3. Select "Edit address" and press the con-
troller.
4. Change entry.
For operation, refer to Entering a destina-
tion manually, page 123.
5. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
Deleting individual destinations from
address book
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
3. Select "Delete address" and press the con-
troller.
Deleting all destinations from address
book
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Delete data" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Delete address book" and press the
controller.
7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Home address
You can store your current position or the cur-
rent destination as the home address in the
address book. This entry occupies the second
position in the address book.
Storing home address
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the controller until
"Home address" is selected and press the
controller.
3. Select "Use current location as address" or
"Save current destination" during destina-
tion guidance and press the controller.
4. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Destination entry
134
Using home address as destination
1. Select "Home address" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
Changing home address
1. Select "Home address" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Edit address" and press the con-
troller. For operation, refer to Entering a
destination manually, page 123.
Route selection
You can influence the calculated route by
choosing certain route criteria. You can change
the route criteria as often as you like during des-
tination entry or during destination guidance.
The route is planned according to fixed rules.
The type of road is taken into account, e.g.
whether it is a highway or a winding road. The
road types are stored on the navigation DVD. As
a result, the routes recommended by the navi-
gation system may not always be the same
ones that you would choose based on personal
experience.
Changing route criteria
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the controller until
"Route preference" is selected and press
the controller.
The various criteria are shown on the Con-
trol Display.
3. Select a route criterion for the route:
> "With highways"
Highways and major traffic arteries are
given priority.
> "Avoid highways"
Highways are avoided as far as possible.
> "Fast route"
Fast route, being a combination of the
shortest possible route and the fastest
roads
> "Short route"
Short route, irrespective of how fast or
slow progress will be
4. Press the controller.
The route criterion is selected.
5. If necessary, select an additional route cri-
terion and then press the controller:
> "Dynamic route"
Automatic rerouting due to traffic
obstructions. Depending on road type
and the kind and extent of the traffic
obstruction, the guided route may lead
through the traffic obstruction.
> "Avoid tollroads"
Toll roads are avoided as far as possible.
> "Avoid ferries"
Ferries are avoided as far as possible.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
The route criteria can also be changed in the
arrow or map display.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
135
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
1. Select the symbol for the route criterion and
press the controller.
2. Select a route criterion and press the con-
troller.
If the "Avoid highways", "Avoid tollroads"
or "Avoid ferries" route criteria are
selected, route calculation may take consider-
ably longer.<
Word-matching principle
The system's word-matching principle makes it
easier for you to enter the names of towns or
streets. The system runs ongoing checks, com-
paring your destination entries with the data
stored on the navigation DVD as the basis for
instant response. The benefits for you include:
> Names of towns entered may differ from the
official versions if you are using a spelling
that is customary in another country.
Example:
Instead of the German spelling "München"
you can also enter the English spelling
"Munich" or the Italian spelling "Monaco".
> When you are entering the names of towns
and streets the system will complete them
automatically as soon as enough letters are
available to ensure unambiguous identifica-
tion.
> The system offers only those letters for
selection of name entries that are stored on
the navigation DVD. Thus, entry of errone-
ous or unregistered names is impossible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Destination guidance
136
Destination guidance
Starting destination
guidance
Via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Navigation" is selected and press the
controller.
2. Select the destination from the destination
list and press the controller or enter a new
destination, refer to page 123.
3. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
After the route has been calculated, destination
guidance is indicated by arrows or a map dis-
play on the Control Display.
Destination guidance can also be started in the
arrow or map display:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
During destination guidance, you can operate
other equipment items at any time via iDrive.
You will be notified in time of any necessary
change of direction by means of spoken
instructions and the display of the direction
arrows.
Via programmable memory keys
... Press the key on which the
desired destination has been stored, refer also
to page 21.
Terminating/continuing
destination guidance
In the arrow or map display
Select the symbol and press the controller.
In the destination list
This symbol indicates the current destina-
tion.
1. Select the current destination and press the
controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
137
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
2. Select "Stop guidance" and press the con-
troller.
If you did not reach the destination before the
end of the last journey, the following question
will appear in the display at the start of the next
journey:
"Continue guidance to destination?".
The destination guidance starts automatically
after a short time.
To start destination guidance immediately:
Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Route display
You can have the route during destination guid-
ance displayed in various ways.
From another menu, you can switch
directly to the screen last displayed, refer
to Convenient call-up of menu items on
page 18.<
Arrow display
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the fourth field
from the top. Turn the controller until
"Arrow display" is selected and press the
controller.
The arrow display is shown.
1 Switching voice instructions on/off
2 Starting/stopping destination guidance
3 Arrow to destination as the crow flies
4 Route criterion
5 Distance to the next change of direction
6 Current location
7 Direction of travel
> Outline of an arrow:
Destination guidance on the calculated
route
> Solid arrow:
Arrow points as the crow flies to the cal-
culated route whenever the vehicle is
not in an area recorded on the navigation
DVD, e.g. in a parking garage.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
projected time of arrival and distance to the
destination is displayed in the top or bottom line
of the Control Display.
The arrows change appearance before a
change of direction.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Destination guidance
138
1 Street name for change of direction
2 Distance to change of direction
3 Change of direction
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Map display
You can have your current position displayed on
a map. After starting the destination guidance,
the planned route is shown on the map.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the fourth field
from the top. Turn the controller until the
desired map display is selected:
> "Map facing north"
> "Map direction of travel"
> "Perspective"
3. Press the controller.
1 Switching voice instructions on/off
2 Starting/stopping destination guidance
3 Map-guided destination selection
4 Displaying the menu in which the informa-
tion last selected can be shown/hidden,
refer to Selecting destination using infor-
mation, page 129
5 Changing map display
> "Map facing north"
> "Map direction of travel"
> "Perspective"
6 Changing route criteria
7 Calling up traffic information
*
manually
8 Arrow to destination as the crow flies
The projected time of arrival and distance to the
destination is displayed in the bottom line of the
Control Display.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
At scales of less than 250 miles/500 km, you
can have the map shown facing north or toward
your current direction of travel, or in perspec-
tive. At scales of 250 miles/500 km or greater,
the map is always north-oriented.
To display the combined map/arrow view:
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Language / Units"
is selected and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
139
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
until "Languages" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Display arrow view" and press the
controller.
1 Switching voice instructions on/off
2 Starting/stopping destination guidance
3 Map-guided destination selection
4 Displaying the menu in which the informa-
tion last selected can be shown/hidden,
refer to Selecting destination using infor-
mation, page 129
5 Changing map display
> "Map facing north"
> "Map direction of travel"
6 Changing route criteria
7 Calling up traffic information
*
manually
8 Arrow to destination as the crow flies
The projected time of arrival and distance to the
destination is displayed in the bottom line of the
Control Display.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
At scales of less than 250 miles/500 km you can
have the map shown facing north or in the cur-
rent direction of travel. At scales of 250 miles/
500 km or greater, the map is always north-ori-
ented.
Changing the map display
Select the corresponding symbol and press the
controller.
The next map display is displayed.
Changing the scale
Turn the controller to adjust the scale.
Displaying towns/cities and streets
along the route
You can have the roads and towns along the
route displayed during destination guidance.
The distances remaining to be traveled within
each section of the route are also displayed.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the controller until
"Route list" is selected and press the con-
troller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Destination guidance
140
Destination guidance
through voice instructions
Switching voice instructions on/off
Voice instructions can be switched on or off
during the destination guidance in the arrow or
map display:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
To switch the voice instructions on/off at any
time:
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Language / Units"
is selected and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Languages" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Navigation voice instructions" and
press the controller.
The voice instructions are switched on.
Repeating or canceling voice
instructions
With the programmable buttons on the steering
wheel, you can also execute the following func-
tions, refer to page 16:
> Repeat the voice instruction:
Press the button.
> Switch voice instructions on/off:
Press the button for a longer period.
Adjusting volume for voice instructions
The volume can be adjusted only while a voice
instruction is being issued.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
141
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
1. Have the last voice instruction repeated, if
necessary.
2. Turn the button during the voice instruction
to select the desired volume.
This volume is independent of the volume of the
audio sources.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Changing a route
During destination guidance, you can revise the
navigation system's route recommendations to
avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the
number of miles/kilometers that you want to
travel before returning to the original route.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the controller until "New
route" is selected and press the controller.
3. Turn the controller to enter the desired
number and press the controller.
The route is recalculated.
To exit from the menu without changing the
route:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Traffic information*
In many metropolitan areas you can receive
traffic information broadcast by radio stations.
The traffic conditions are monitored by traffic
control centers and the traffic information is
updated periodically.
During destination guidance, the traffic infor-
mation relevant to the route you are planning to
take is automatically shown and, if desired,
taken into account in route planning. Whether
destination guidance is active or not, you can
have the traffic information displayed in the map
view or in the traffic info list.
Switching reception of traffic
information on/off
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Destination guidance
142
4. Turn the controller until "Traffic Info set-
tings" is selected and press the controller.
5. Select "Traffic Info" and press the control-
ler.
The traffic information can be received and
displayed.
"AUTO": automatic selection of the Traffic Info
station with the best reception.
Depending on the station, either the sta-
tion name, frequency, local number or
other information is displayed.<
Calling up traffic information manually
During destination guidance
During destination guidance, traffic information
can be displayed in the arrow or map view.
If the symbol is shown with a red border, traf-
fic information is available for the planned route.
Select the symbol and press the controller.
During destination guidance, traffic information
items along the planned route are indicated by
yellow diamonds.
Traffic information on the planned route is
shown first, sorted by distance from the vehi-
cle's current position.
With destination guidance switched off
1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to call up
"Navigation".
3. Select "Traffic Info" and press the control-
ler.
Traffic information on the planned route is
shown first, sorted by distance from the vehi-
cle's current position.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
143
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Displaying traffic information in map
display
The traffic information icons are shown in the
map display up to a scale of 100 miles/200 km.
The highlighting of the stretch corresponding
to the traffic report and the icons for the type of
event as described below are displayed and
hidden. This depends on the selected scale.
Displaying detailed traffic information
Select a traffic information item from the list and
press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Traffic information icons
Traffic event displayed with map
scales larger than 5 miles/10 km;
arrow points in relevant direction of
travel.
There are several traffic events.
Switch to a smaller map scale to
show more detail.
Traffic light failure
Roadworks
General traffic obstruction
Transport of hazardous load
Vehicle on wrong carriageway
Danger
Low clearance
No parking
Fog
Heavy rain
Slippery road
Cross winds
Smog
Road closed
Slow traffic
Traffic backup
Stopped traffic
Icy roads
Uneven surface
Accident
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Destination guidance
144
Traffic information during destination
guidance
In the event of a traffic obstruction on the
planned route, the traffic information icons are
shown with a red border.
System response will vary depending on
whether or not "Dynamic route" is selected,
refer to page 134.
Displaying traffic obstructions
When the navigation system receives a traffic
obstruction message and "Dynamic route" is
not selected, you are shown certain informa-
tion, such as the length of the traffic congestion,
when you are approx. 25 miles/40 km away
from the traffic obstruction.
The last possible detour exit is indicated just
before you reach it.
Select "Detour" and press the controller.
The navigation system calculates a new route
avoiding the congestion.
This information is displayed even if you have
called up another application on the Control
Display.
Dynamic route planning
When "Dynamic route" is selected, the route
will be changed automatically in the event of a
traffic obstruction. The system does not point
out traffic obstructions on the original route.
Depending on road type and the kind and extent
of the traffic obstruction, the calculated route
may lead through the traffic obstruction.
Displaying current position
You can have your current position displayed
even when the destination guidance is
switched off.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the fourth field
from the top. Turn the controller until "Cur-
rent position" is selected and press the
controller.
Lane closure
Delay
Police checkpoint
Slow traffic or other traffic event
Stop and go traffic
Stopped traffic
Traffic events in both directions of
travel
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
145
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
The current position of your BMW is displayed.
If the navigation system is unable to identify a
town or city, your current map coordinates will
appear.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
You can also have the current position dis-
played on a map, refer to page 138.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
What to do if …
146
What to do if …
What to do if …
> a navigation DVD is inserted, but an instruc-
tion to insert the DVD appears on the Con-
trol Display?
The navigation DVD may not be the correct
DVD for the navigation system. This infor-
mation is indicated on the DVD label.
> you request the current position of your
vehicle, but do not receive a precise dis-
play?
The system is unable to receive enough
GPS signals at your current position due to
obstructions, your current position is not
yet available on your navigation DVD, or the
system is in the process of calculating your
current position. As a rule, reception is
guaranteed when you are in the open.
> the destination guidance does not accept a
destination?
The data of the destination is not stored on
the navigation DVD that is loaded. Choose a
destination as close as possible to the orig-
inal one.
> the destination guidance does not accept
an address without the street name?
On the navigation DVD, no downtown area
can be determined for the city or town
entered. Enter any street, or a destination
such as the railway station in the selected
town, and then start the destination guid-
ance.
> you want to enter a destination for the des-
tination guidance, but it is not possible to
select the letters for your desired entry?
The data of the destination is not stored on
the navigation DVD that is loaded. In this
case, the system will not offer you any let-
ters to choose from. Choose a destination
as close as possible to the original one.
> the system stops furnishing directions on
which way to turn as you approach intersec-
tions?
You are driving in an area that has not yet
been completely recorded on the naviga-
tion DVD. Instead of an arrow indicating a
turn, you will see an arrow which indicates
the general direction of your planned route.
Or you have left the recommended route
and the system requires a few seconds to
calculate a new recommended route.
> the navigation system does not react to
entries?
If the battery was disconnected, it takes
about 10 minutes before the system is once
again operational.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
147
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Entertainment
Operation of the radio, CD equipment and
external audio devices as well as their tone
settings are described in this chapter.
Entertainment
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
On/off and settings
150
On/off and settings
The following audio sources have shared con-
trols and setting options:
> Radio
> CD player
> CD changer
*
Controls
The audio sources can be operated using:
> Buttons near the CD player
> iDrive
> Buttons
on the steering wheel, refer to
page 11
> Programmable memory keys, refer to
page 21
Buttons on the CD player
1 Sound output for entertainment on/off, vol-
ume
> Press: switch on/off.
When you switch on the unit, the last set
radio station or track is played.
> Turn: adjust volume.
2 Drive for audio CDs
3 Eject CD.
4 Station scan/track search
> Change radio station.
> Select track for CD player and CD
changer.
5 Drive for navigation DVD
Operation via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
You have the following choices:
> "FM" and "AM": radio reception
> "SAT": satellite radio
*
> "CD": CD player or changer
*
> "AUX": AUX-In port, USB-audio interface
*
> "Set": depending on the audio source,
other adjustments can be made, e.g. with
the radio: update station with strongest
reception, store station, tone control, sam-
ple stations.
From another menu, you can switch
directly to the screen last displayed, refer
to Convenient call-up of menu items on
page 18.<
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond,
the selected audio source is stored for the
remote control currently in use.
Switching on/off
To switch the entertainment audio output on or
off:
Press button 1 on the CD player.
This symbol on the Control Display indi-
cates that sound output is switched off.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
151
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Adjusting volume
Turn knob 1 on the CD player until the desired
volume is obtained.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond,
the setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Tone control
You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble
and bass or the speed-dependent volume
increase.
The tone settings are applied to all audio
sources.
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond,
the settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Changing tone settings
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.
The tone settings can also be selected if you
have called up "Entertainment" in the start
menu:
Select "Set" and then "Tone", pressing the
controller after each selection.
Treble and bass
1. Select "Treble / Bass" and press the con-
troller.
2. Move the controller to the left or right to
select "Treble" or "Bass".
3. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
Balance and fader
You can adjust the volume distribution in the
same manner as "Treble / Bass".
> "Balance": left/right volume distribution
> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution
Speed-dependent volume control
The speed-dependent volume control auto-
matically increases the volume with increasing
driving speed. You can set various stages for
the increase in volume.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
On/off and settings
152
1. Select "Speed volume" and press the con-
troller.
2. Turn the controller:
The adjustment is applied; the field can be
changed.
HiFi System Professional*
You can select a spatial sound effect that
improves the spatial acoustics in all frequency
ranges.
1. Select "Surround Settings" and press the
controller.
2. Select "Concert hall" or "Theater".
3. Press the controller.
The spatial sound effect is switched on.
To switch off the spatial sound effect:
Select "Off" and press the controller.
Individual High-End Audio System*
You can choose between stereo and multichan-
nel playback, surround.
1. Select "Surround Settings" and press the
controller.
2. Select "Stereo" or "Surround".
Equalizer*
You can set individual sound frequency ranges.
1. Select "Equalizer" and press the controller.
2. Move the controller to the left or right to
select the desired frequency range.
3. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
Resetting tone settings
You can reset all tone settings to the default
setting.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
153
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Reset" is selected and press the con-
troller.
6. In vehicles equipped with two drives:
Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Radio
154
Radio
Your radio provides reception of the FM and AM
wavebands.
Listening to the radio
Press the button if the sound output is switched
off.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Select "FM" or "AM".
4. Press the controller.
Stations are shown on the Control Display on
the basis of various selection criteria, e.g. "Pre-
sets".
If "Autostore" does not show a station in the AM
waveband or if the displayed stations are no
longer receivable, update the stations with the
best reception, refer to page 155.
Changing stations
Turn the controller.
Buttons on the CD player
Press the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
The system switches to the next displayed sta-
tion.
You can also change the station with the but-
tons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
Changing selection criteria
In addition to the stations currently displayed,
you can have stations with another selection
criterion displayed.
You can choose from the following selection
criteria:
> "All stations"
*
:
Stations that can currently be received on
the "FM" waveband.
> "Autostore":
Stations with the best reception on the
"AM" waveband. For High Definition Radio:
stations with the best reception on the
"FM" waveband.
> "Presets":
Stations you have previously stored, refer to
page 156.
> "Manual":
To set stations that can be received in addi-
tion to those already being displayed, refer
to Selecting the frequency manually,
page 155.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
155
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
To change the selection criterion:
1. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top.
2. Choose a selection criterion and press the
controller.
Sampling stations, Scan
The stations on the current waveband are auto-
matically sampled in succession.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
"Set" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
The stations are sampled.
Stop sampling:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
Station sampling is interrupted and the
selected station stays on.
Buttons on the CD player
To sample stations, press the but-
ton for the corresponding direction for an
extended time.
To stop scanning, press the button again.
Selecting the frequency manually
With "Manual" you can select stations that can
be received in addition to those displayed.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top.
3. Select "Manual" and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller to set a certain fre-
quency.
Updating stations with best reception
If on a longer journey you move out of the
reception range of the stations originally
received, you can update the list of stations
received with the strongest signals in the AM
waveband.
1. Select "AM" and press the controller.
2. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top.
3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
"Set" is selected.
4. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Radio
156
5. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
The display of the stations with the strongest
reception is updated. The frequencies of the
stations are displayed.
Storing stations
Via iDrive
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top. Turn the controller until
the desired selection criterion is chosen
and press the controller.
3. Select the desired frequency or station.
"Set" is selected.
4. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
5. Select "Store" and press the controller.
"Presets" is displayed.
6. Turn the controller until the desired mem-
ory location is selected.
7. Press the controller.
The station is stored.
The channels of the last selection criterion are
displayed once again after a short time.
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond,
the stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Via programmable memory keys
You can store a station on the programmable
memory keys, refer also to page 21.
1. Select a station.
2. ... Press the desired key for a
longer period.
Changing a memory position
1. Select "Presets" and press the controller.
2. Select the desired station.
"Set" is selected.
3. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
157
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
4. Select "Store" and press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until the desired mem-
ory location is selected.
The number of the memory location
appears beside the name or frequency of
the station.
6. Press the controller.
The station is stored.
Radio Data System RDS
On the FM waveband, additional information is
broadcast via RDS. If the reception conditions
are good, the station names are shown on the
Control Display. Where reception is poor or in
the event of interference, it may take some time
before the station names will appear in the dis-
play.
Switching RDS on/off*
1. Select "FM" and press the controller.
"Set" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "RDS" and press the controller.
RDS is activated.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
High Definition Radio*
Many stations transmit analog and digital sig-
nals. You can receive these stations digitally for
improved sound quality.
A digital radio network must be available to be
able to receive digital stations.
Switching digital radio reception on/off
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.
5. Move the highlight marker to the uppermost
field. Turn the controller until "HD radio" is
selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Off" and press the controller.
Digital station reception is now switched on.
This symbol is displayed when a station is
received digitally.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Radio
158
Some stations do not transmit the digital and
analog signals simultaneously. If you are in an
area in which digital reception of the selected
station is not possible continuously, reception
will alternate between analog and digital. This
can cause repetitions or interruptions. In this
case it may be preferable to switch off digital
reception.
Selecting the programs of a digital
station*
Some stations broadcast several programs on a
single frequency. To select one of these pro-
grams:
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Select "Manual" and press the controller.
3. Select a station that can be received digi-
tally.
This symbol is displayed when a station
is received digitally.
4. Change to the next program of
the digital station using the buttons on the
radio or steering wheel.
You can store a station, refer to page 156.
Updating digitally receivable stations
If on a longer journey you move out of the
reception range of the stations originally
received, you can update the list of stations
received with the strongest signals.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top.
3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
4. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
5. Select "Autostore " and press the con-
troller.
The display of the digitally receivable stations is
updated. This can take up to 2 minutes.
Displaying additional information
With digital stations, additional information on
the current track can be displayed, e.g. the
name of the artist.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
159
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
1. Select the station and press the controller.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
The information is displayed.
When you change to another digitally received
station, any additional information is displayed
after a brief interruption.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Satellite radio
160
Satellite radio
You can receive over 100 different channels
with high sound quality.
The channels are offered to you in predefined
packages. To receive the channels of your
choice, you must have the corresponding pack-
ages enabled.
With this new technology, signal losses
can occur from time to time and result in
audio interruptions.<
Enabling or disabling
channels
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
3. Select "SAT".
4. Press the controller.
The channels are displayed.
These channels are enabled.
Enabling
1. Select a channel that has not yet been
enabled and press the controller.
A telephone number and the electronic
serial number, ESN, are displayed.
The electronic serial number is
required for enabling or disabling.<
2. To enable the channel:
Dial the phone number.
Disabling
1. Select an enabled channel and press the
controller.
2. Select "ESN" and press the controller.
The electronic serial number, ESN, is dis-
played.
The electronic serial number is
required for disabling.<
3. To disable the channel:
Dial the phone number.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
161
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Selecting and storing a
channel
1. Select "SAT" and press the controller.
Channels and categories are displayed on
the Control Display.
2. Select a menu item:
> "Presets":
Up to twelve channels you stored previ-
ously.
> "All channels":
All channels are displayed.
> "Categories":
All channels, sorted by category, e.g.
news, jazz.
3. Press the controller.
4. If "Categories" has been selected:
Select the desired category and press the
controller.
The channels of this category are displayed.
5. Select a channel marked with this sym-
bol.
6. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
7. Select "Details" and press the controller.
Additional information
The name of the channel and additional infor-
mation on the current track are displayed, e.g.
the name of the artist.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Satellite radio
162
1 Artist
2 Track
Storing a channel
1. Select the desired channel.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "Store" and press the controller.
"Presets" is displayed.
4. Turn the controller to select a memory loca-
tion and press the controller.
The channel is stored. The channels of the last
selection criterion are displayed again after a
short time.
Changing channels with buttons on CD
player
Press the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
The system switches to the next enabled chan-
nel.
Notes
When more than 4 seconds go by and no signal
is received, a message appears on the Control
Display.
Under some circumstances, e.g. depend-
ing on environmental or topographic con-
ditions, it may not be possible to receive any
signal. The satellite radio cannot influence this.
A signal may not be available in tunnels or
underground garages, next to high-rise build-
ings, in the vicinity of trees, mountains or other
strong sources of radio interference.
Reception usually resumes as soon as the sig-
nal becomes available again.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
163
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
CD player and CD changer
Listening to CDs
Compressed audio files
CDs with compressed audio files, MP3s, can be
played by the CD player and CD changer.
Starting the CD player
The upper drive is for audio CDs.
Insert the CD into the drive with the labeled side
up.
The CD is pulled in automatically. Playback
starts automatically if the sound output is on.
When playing CDs with compressed audio files,
it can take the CD player approx. 1 minute to
read in the data, depending on the directory
structure.
To start playback when there is already a CD in
the drive:
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Select "CD" and press
the controller.
4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the second field from the top. On cars with a
CD changer, select "CD" and press the
controller to start the CD player.
Playback starts automatically if the sound out-
put is switched on.
Via programmable memory keys
You can store the CD player function on the
programmable memory keys to start the CD
player, refer to page 21.
Starting the CD changer
Fill and insert the CD magazine, refer to
page 167.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
CD player and CD changer
164
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Select "CD" and press
the controller.
4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the second field from the top. Select the
desired CD and press the controller.
At the end of the last track, the next CD is
selected and played.
If new CDs have been placed in the CD maga-
zine, playback starts with the lowest CD, e.g.
CD 1, track 1.
The CD magazine's load status is indicated on
the Control Display.
Via programmable memory keys
You can store a CD compartment of the CD
changer on the programmable memory keys to
start the CD changer, refer to page 21.
Selecting a track
Buttons on the CD player
Press the button for the appropriate
direction as often as necessary until the desired
track is reached.
The track is displayed on the Control Display.
You can also change the track with the buttons
on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
Via iDrive
Turn the controller to select a track.
Compressed audio files*
1. Select a directory, if necessary, and press
the controller.
2. Select a track and press the controller.
To change the directory:
Select the directory and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
165
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
If the car is equipped with two CD drives, you
can save specific tracks on the programmable
memory keys, refer to page 21.
Displaying information about the
track*
With compressed audio files, any information
about the current track that has been recorded
can be displayed, e.g. the name of the artist.
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
The information is shown for the current track.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Sampling tracks, Scan
All tracks on the current CD are automatically
sampled once in succession.
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
Stop sampling:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
Track sampling is interrupted and the selected
track is played on.
Compressed audio files*
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To sample all the tracks in the current
directory, select "Scan directory" and
press the controller.
> To sample all the tracks on the CD,
select "Scan all" and press the control-
ler.
Stop sampling:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Scan directory" or "Scan all" and
press the controller.
Sampling is interrupted and the selected track
is retained.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
CD player and CD changer
166
Repeating tracks
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.
The current track on the CD is repeated.
Stop repeating:
1. Press the controller again.
2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.
Compressed audio files*
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To repeat the selected track, select
"Repeat track" and press the controller.
> To repeat all the tracks in the current
directory, select "Repeat directory" and
press the controller.
Stop repeating:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Repeat track" or "Repeat directory"
and press the controller.
Random play sequence
The tracks on the current CD are played once
each in random order.
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
Stop random function:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
167
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Compressed audio files*
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To play all the tracks in the current direc-
tory in random order, select "Random
directory" and press the controller.
> To play all the tracks on the CD in ran-
dom order, select "Random all" and
press the controller.
Stop random function:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random directory" or "Random all"
and press the controller.
Fast forward/reverse
Buttons on the CD player:
Press and hold the button for the
corresponding direction.
The tracks can be heard, but reproduction is
distorted.
CD magazine
The BMW CD changer for six CDs is behind the
left side panel in the cargo bay.
Removing the CD magazine
To insert or remove CDs from the CD magazine,
you must first remove it from the CD changer:
1. Push the cover to one side, arrow 1.
2. Press the button, arrow 2.
The CD magazine is ejected.
Inserting/removing CDs from the CD
magazine
When loading CDs into or removing them from
the CD magazine, hold them at their edges and
do not touch the reflective signal-sensing area.
Inserting CDs:
Insert the CD in its slot with the label side on
top.
Removing CDs:
Pull out the desired drawer, see arrow, and
remove the CD.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
CD player and CD changer
168
Inserting the CD magazine
Insert the CD magazine all the way in the direc-
tion of arrow 1 and close the cover, arrow 2.
The CD changer automatically reads in the
loaded CDs and is then ready for operation.
Notes
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
officially designated Class 1 laser prod-
ucts. Do not operate if the cover is damaged,
otherwise severe eye damage can result.
Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels
applied as these can become detached during
playback due to heat build-up and can cause
irreparable damage to the device.
Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/
DVDs with an adapter, e.g. Single-CDs, other-
wise the CDs or the adapter can jam and will no
longer eject.
Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVD
Plus
,
otherwise the CD/DVD can jam and will no
longer eject.<
General malfunctions
BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been
optimized for performance in vehicles. In some
instances they may be more sensitive to faulty
CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it
has been inserted correctly.
Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensa-
tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and
temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs
If malfunctions only occur with individual CDs/
DVDs, one of the following factors may be the
cause.
Self-recorded CDs/DVDs
Possible reasons for malfunctions with self-
recorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g., inconsistent
data-creation or recording processes, or poor
quality or high age of the CD/DVD blank.
Only label CDs/DVDs on the top, with a pen
designed for this purpose.
Damage prevention
Avoid leaving fingerprints, as well as dust,
scratches or moisture on the CDs/DVDs.
Keep CDs/DVDs in protective sleeves or cases.
Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over
1207/506, high levels of humidity or direct
sunlight.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the
manufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/
DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to
a limited extent.
Care
Clean the reflective signal side of CDs/DVDs as
needed by wiping it with a commercially avail-
able cleaning tissue in straight lines from the
center of the disc outwards.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
169
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
AUX-In port
You can connect an external audio device, for
instance an MP3 player, and play audio tracks
over the car's loudspeaker system. You can
adjust the tone using iDrive.
Connecting
Connection for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm
To play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker
system, connect the headset or line-out port of
the external device to the AUX-in port.
Starting audio playback
The audio device must be switched on.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "AUX" is selected and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "AUX IN" and press the controller.
5. Adjust volume and tone, if necessary.
Via programmable memory keys
You can store the "AUX" function on the pro-
grammable memory keys to start audio play-
back, refer to page 21.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
USB-audio interface
170
USB-audio interface
You can connect audio devices, e.g. an iPod or
a USB device (MP3 player, USB stick), to the
USB-audio interface. They can be operated via
iDrive.
Standard audio formats, e.g. MP3, WMA, WAV
(PCM) and AAC, and playlists in the M3U format
can be played.
Due the variety of audio devices on the market,
it cannot be guaranteed that every device will
be operable on the vehicle.
Ask your BMW center about what audio devices
are suitable.
Connecting
Lift up the center armrest.
1 Connection for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm
2 USB interface
Depending on your vehicle's equipment
version, it may contain a storage pouch
for your audio device. The pouch is located
under the center armrest.<
iPod
To connect the iPod use the BMW cable
adapter for Apple iPod. For more information,
contact your BMW center or go to the Internet:
www.bmw.com
To play audio tracks over the vehicle's loud-
speaker system, connect the iPod to ports 1
and 2.
The iPod's menu structure is supported by the
USB-audio interface.
USB device
To connect the device, use the included
flexible adapter cable to protect the USB
interface and your USB device against physical
damage.<
To play audio tracks over the vehicle's loud-
speaker system, connect the USB device to
port 2.
After the device is connected for the first time,
the information on all tracks (e.g. artist, type of
music) and the playlists are transferred from the
USB device to the vehicle. This procedure may
take some time. The duration depends on the
USB device and the number of tracks.
During transfer, you can select the tracks using
the directories and file names.
After transfer, you can call up the tracks using
the information and playlists.
Information from up to four USB devices or for
about 20,000 tracks can be stored on the vehi-
cle.
If a fifth USB device is connected and if more
than 20,000 tracks are to be stored, the infor-
mation on existing tracks may be lost.
Music tracks with integrated Digital
Rights Management (DRM) cannot be
played.<
Starting audio playback
Via iDrive
If the audio device has a device name, the name
is displayed.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
171
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "AUX" is selected and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "USB" or the name of the audio
device and press the controller.
Playback begins with the first track.
Via programmable memory keys
You can store the "USB" function on the pro-
grammable memory keys to start audio play-
back, refer to page 21.
Selecting a track
You can call up the tracks using the playlists
and information. With USB devices you can also
call up tracks using the file directory. The tracks
can be displayed if they have been stored in the
Latin alphabet.
1. Make your selection, e.g. "Playlists" or "Art-
ists", and press the controller.
2. Select a track and press the controller.
Displaying information about the track
Any information about the current track that has
been recorded can be displayed, e.g. the name
of the artist.
1. Press the controller during playback.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
The information is shown for the current track.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
USB-audio interface
172
Repeating tracks
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Repeat track" and press the con-
troller.
Stop repeating:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Repeat track" and press the con-
troller.
Random play sequence
You can play the tracks in the selected list in
random order, e.g. all tracks of a single artist.
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
Stop random play:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
Fast forward/reverse
Buttons on the steering wheel or CD player:
Press and hold the button for the
corresponding direction.
Notes
Do not expose the audio device to
extreme environmental conditions, e.g.
very high temperatures, refer to the operating
instructions of the audio device. Otherwise the
audio device may become damaged, which
could compromise safety while driving.<
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 KBit/s, the
files may not play back correctly in every case.
Notes on connecting
> The USB-audio interface acts as the power
supply to the connected audio devices, pro-
vided that this is supported by the audio
device. Therefore, do not connect the USB
audio device to the power socket in the
vehicle during operation.
> Do not forcibly connect the plug to the USB
interface.
> Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB-audio interface.
> Do not connect USB hard disks.
> Do not use the USB-audio interface to
charge external devices.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
173
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Communications
This chapter describes how to use the
telephone, BMW Assist and BMW
TeleServices.
Communications
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Telephoning
176
Telephoning
The concept
Your BMW is equipped with a full mobile phone
preparation package. After pairing a suitable
mobile phone with the vehicle once, you can
operate the mobile phone via iDrive, the buttons
on the steering wheel or via voice commands.
Once a mobile phone has been paired with your
vehicle, it is automatically recognized as soon
as it is inside the vehicle while the engine is run-
ning or the ignition is switched on. You can
store the pairing data for up to four mobile
phones simultaneously. If several mobile
phones are detected at the same time, the
mobile phone last paired can be operated via
the vehicle.
Using the telephone inside
the vehicle
Using the snap-in adapter*
The so-called snap-in adapter, a holder for
mobile phones, allows you to charge the mobile
phone's battery and connect the mobile phone
to your vehicle's outside antenna. This ensures
better network reception and consistent repro-
duction quality. Please contact your
BMW center to find out for which mobile
phones there are snap-in adapters available.
For your safety
A car phone makes life more convenient in
many ways, and can even save lives in an emer-
gency. While you should consult your mobile
phone's separate Owner's Manual for a detailed
description of safety precautions and informa-
tion, we request that you direct your particular
attention to the following:
Only make entries when the traffic situa-
tion allows you to do so. Do not hold the
mobile phone in your hand while you are driving;
use the hands-free system instead. If you do
not observe this precaution, your being dis-
tracted can endanger vehicle occupants and
other road users.<
Suitable mobile phones
Please ask your BMW center which mobile
phones with Bluetooth interface are supported
by the mobile phone preparation package and
which mobile phones are compatible with the
snap-in adapter. By virtue of their particular
software versions, these mobile phones sup-
port the functions described in this Owner's
Manual. Malfunctions may occur with other
mobile phones.
Care instructions
Important information on this subject can be
found in the separate mobile phone Owner's
Manual.
Operating options
You can operate the mobile phone
*
using:
> Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
page 11
> iDrive, refer to page 181
> Voice commands, refer to page 187
> Programmable memory keys, refer to
page 21
Avoid operating a mobile phone recognized by
the vehicle via the mobile phone's keypad, oth-
erwise malfunctions may result.
Making phone calls with the
BMW Assist system*: BMW Assist
calls
You can use the BMW Assist System via the
hands-free unit for BMW Assist calls.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
177
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
When the status information "BMW Assist" or
"BMW Service" is displayed in "Communica-
tion", only BMW Assist calls are possible.
It may not be possible to establish a telephone
connection using the mobile phone while a con-
nection is being established to BMW Assist or
while a call to BMW Assist is already in
progress. If this happens, you must unpair the
mobile phone and the vehicle if you wish to
place a call with the mobile phone.
Start-up
Pairing the mobile phone with the
vehicle
The following prerequisites must be met:
> Compatible mobile phone: the mobile
phone is supported by the full preparation
package mobile phone. You can obtain
information on the Internet at:
www.bmw.com
> The mobile phone is ready to operate.
> The Bluetooth link is activated in the vehi-
cle, refer to page 181, and in the mobile
phone.
> Depending on the mobile phone, some
default settings may be necessary for the
mobile phone: e.g. using the following
menu items:
> Bluetooth switched on
> Connection without confirmation
> Reconnection
> Depending on the mobile phone type, the
power-saving mode setting, for example,
may result in a paired mobile phone not
being detected by the vehicle.
> For pairing purposes, define any number as
the Bluetooth passkey, e.g. 1. This Blue-
tooth passkey is no longer required after
pairing has been successful.
> The ignition is switched on.
Pair the mobile phone with the vehicle
only when the car is stationary, to avoid
endangering the car's occupants and other
road users by being distracted.<
Switch on ignition
1. Insert remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
2. Switch on ignition without operating the
brake or clutch or pressing the start/stop
button.
Preparation via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
3. Press the button to call up the start
menu.
4. Press the controller to open the menu.
5. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
6. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Telephoning
178
7. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top, select "Phone" and press
the controller.
8. Select "Pair new phone" and press the con-
troller.
9. Select "Start pairing" and press the control-
ler.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis-
played.
Preparation via the mobile phone
10. Further steps must be carried out with the
mobile phone and vary depending on the
model. Please refer to your mobile phone's
operating instructions, e.g. under the topics
of Searching for a Bluetooth device, Linking
or Pairing.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle also
appears on the mobile phone display.
11. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
Pairing
Depending on your mobile phone, you will see
messages, first on the mobile phone display or
on the iDrive, requesting you to enter the same
Bluetooth passkey previously determined by
you.
12. Enter the Bluetooth passkey.
Depending on the mobile phone, you will
have approx. 30 seconds to enter your
Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone
and the Control Display.
13. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top, select "Confirm passkey" and
press the controller.
14. Wait several seconds until the "Communi-
cation" menu is displayed.
The next time you use the mobile phone inside
the vehicle, it will be recognized within no more
than 2 minutes as long as the engine is running
or the ignition is switched on.
With some mobile phones it may be nec-
essary to make certain settings for a per-
manent Bluetooth link, e.g. using the authoriza-
tion or secure connection menu item, refer to
your mobile phone's operating instructions.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
179
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
As soon as a mobile phone is detected by the
vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the
SIM card or on your mobile phone are transmit-
ted to the vehicle. This data transfer depends
on your mobile phone and can take several min-
utes; please refer to your mobile phone's oper-
ating instructions, if necessary.
If not all phone book entries are displayed:
> Transfer all phone book entries from the
SIM card to the mobile phone, if necessary.
> Phone book entries with special characters
may not be displayed.
Up to four mobile phones can be paired, one
after the other. If a fifth mobile phone is paired,
the pairing data for the mobile phone whose
pairing data was first stored on the vehicle is
deleted.
Checks to perform if pairing is
unsuccessful
> Is the mobile phone supported by the
mobile phone preparation package? You
can obtain information on the Internet at:
www.bmw.com.
> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and vehicle match? The same Blue-
tooth passkey must be entered on the
mobile phone's display and via iDrive.
> Did it take you more than 30 seconds to
enter the Bluetooth passkey?
> Only a limited number of devices can be
connected with the mobile phone. If neces-
sary, delete connections with other devices.
> Is the mobile phone no longer responding?
Switch the mobile phone off and on or
briefly disconnect the power supply.
To repeat pairing:
1. Select "Restart pairing" and press the con-
troller.
2. Repeat steps 9 to 14.
If pairing fails again, contact BMW Customer
Relations.
To call BMW Customer Relations:
Select "Help" and press the controller.
The phone number for BMW Customer Rela-
tions and information necessary for pairing
appear on the display. In mobile phones that are
already connected, you can select the BMW
Customer Relations phone number to place the
call.
List of paired mobile phones
Mobile phones with pairing data stored by the
vehicle can be displayed. If several mobile
phones are detected by the vehicle at the same
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Telephoning
180
time, the mobile phone at the top of the list can
be operated via the vehicle.
You can change the order of the mobile phones
on the list. As long as a mobile phone from this
list is selected, you cannot operate the mobile
phones via the vehicle.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button to call up the start
menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
5. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top, select "Phone" and press
the controller.
6. Select the desired mobile phone and press
the controller.
7. Select "Move device up" and press the con-
troller.
The selected mobile phone moves up one posi-
tion on the list.
Unpairing the mobile phone from the
vehicle
Should you no longer wish to operate a mobile
phone via the vehicle, you can delete the mobile
phone's pairing data.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Switch off the mobile phone.
2. Press the button to call up the start
menu.
3. Press the controller to open the menu.
4. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
5. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
"Bluetooth" is selected.
6. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top, select "Phone" and press
the controller.
7. Select the desired mobile phone and press
the controller.
8. Select "Delete device" and press the con-
troller.
The unpaired mobile phone is deleted from the
list.
The phone book entries and the lists of stored
phone numbers are deleted as well.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Telephoning
182
> Selecting stored phone numbers, e.g. from
the list of accepted calls
> Ending a call
When the ignition and radio readiness are
switched off, e.g. after taking the remote control
out of the ignition switch, you can continue an
ongoing call via the hands-free system for no
more than 25 minutes.
Voice quality
If the person you are talking to is having difficul-
ties understanding you, this may be due to
excessive background noise. The full mobile
phone preparation package can compensate
for these noises to a certain extent. To optimize
voice quality during a call, we recommend that
you:
> Reduce background noise, e.g. by closing
the windows, reducing air flow from the
automatic climate control or by pointing the
open front air vents downward
> Reduce the volume of the hands-free sys-
tem
Requirements
> The mobile phone's pairing data are stored
by the vehicle and the mobile phone is oper-
ational.
> The engine is running or the ignition is
switched on.
> The mobile phone is recognized by the
vehicle.
Calling up communication
Many of the functions described below are con-
trolled using the "Communication" menu.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button to call up the start
menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to call up
"Communication".
Receiving calls
If you have the phone number of the caller
stored in the phone book and the phone num-
ber has been transmitted, the name of the entry
is displayed.
Accepting a call
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Alternatively:
"Accept" is selected.
Press the controller.
Rejecting a call
Select "Reject" and press the controller.
The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has
been activated.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
183
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "Dial" and press the controller.
3. Enter the desired phone number by select-
ing the digits individually and pressing the
controller.
Always enter the complete phone number
consisting of national dialing code, area
code, and phone number.
The letters correspond to the numbers on
the keypad of the mobile phone.
To delete the last digit:
Move the controller towards the right to
select the arrow and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Dial number" and press the control-
ler.
Alternatively: press the button on the
steering wheel.
For your phone number to be displayed to the
person you are talking to, the display of phone
numbers must be enabled by your provider.
Via programmable memory keys
You can store phone numbers on the program-
mable memory keys to call these numbers
directly, refer to page 21.
Ending a call
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Alternatively:
1. Select the phone number and press the
controller.
2. "End call" is selected.
Press the controller.
Selecting a phone number from the
phone book or from a list of stored
phone numbers
Phone numbers you have dialed, received calls
and phone book entries are stored in lists when
the mobile phone is linked to the vehicle via
Bluetooth. If the caller is listed in the phone
book, the name of the entry is displayed instead
of the phone number.
You can select the desired subscriber from the
list and establish the connection.
Five lists are available:
> "A - Z"
The entries in your mobile phone's phone
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Telephoning
184
book, consisting of names and phone num-
bers, are sorted alphabetically.
> "Top 8"
The eight numbers dialed most frequently
from the "A - Z" phone book are automati-
cally stored in the Top 8 list.
> "Redial"
The last eight phone numbers you have
dialed are automatically stored. The last
number dialed is at the top of the list.
> "Missed calls"
The phone numbers of the last eight
rejected calls are stored. This requires the
telephone number of the caller to have been
transmitted.
> "Received calls"
The phone numbers of the last eight
accepted calls are stored. This requires the
telephone number of the caller to have been
transmitted.
Selecting phone numbers from phone
book
The "A - Z" list is available for your phone book
entries. The phone book entries appear on the
Control Display.
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.
3. To limit the number of displayed entries,
select the initial letter of the desired entry
and press the controller.
4. Select the desired entry and press the con-
troller.
5. Select "Call" and press the controller.
The system dials the number.
If different phone numbers are stored in the
mobile phone under one name, e.g. office and
home, the name is shown once for each phone
number.
You can change a phone number stored in the
phone book, e.g. to call a specific extension:
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.
3. Select the desired entry and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "Add digits" and press the controller.
5. Change the phone number.
6. Select "Dial number" and press the control-
ler.
Dialing a stored phone number from a
list
To select an entry and establish a connection:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
185
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select a list and press the controller:
> "Top 8"
> "Redial"
> "Missed calls"
> "Received calls"
3. Select the desired entry and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "Call" and press the controller.
The system dials the number.
Deleting an individual entry
1. Select the desired entry from the list and
press the controller.
2. Select "Delete" and press the controller.
The entry is deleted.
Deleting the entire list
1. Select an entry from the list and press the
controller.
2. Select "Delete all numbers" and press the
controller.
3. If applicable, select "Yes" and press the
controller.
The list is deleted.
BMW Contact*
If BMW Assist has not been enabled for you,
you can have several service numbers dis-
played:
> BMW Roadside Assistance
*
if you need
help in the event of a breakdown
> BMW Service if you wish to schedule a ser-
vice appointment, for example
> BMW Customer Relations
*
for information
related to your vehicle
If BMW Assist is enabled, refer to page 191.
You can dial the displayed service numbers if
your mobile phone has been paired with the
vehicle:
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select
"Communication".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Telephoning
186
3. Select "BMW Contact" and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "BMW Contact Numbers" and press
the controller.
5. Select one of the following menu items and
press the controller:
> "Roadside Assistance"
> "Customer Relations"
> "Service Request"
6. Select "Call" and press the controller.
Contact will be established.
Dialing phone numbers via touch tones
Touch-tone dialing is required for access to
network services or for controlling devices, e.g.
for remote querying on an answering machine.
This function is available whenever there is a
connection.
1. Establish connection.
2. Move the controller backwards until the
bottom field is selected.
3. Select the desired touch-tone character
and press the controller.
Each selection is transmitted immediately
and is confirmed by a tone, depending on
the type of mobile phone you are using.
Switching between mobile
phone and hands-free system
From mobile phone to hands-free
system*
You can continue ongoing calls outside of the
vehicle's Bluetooth range via the hands-free
system as long as the engine is running or the
ignition is switched on. Depending on your
mobile phone, the system automatically
switches to hands-free mode.
With mobile phones that do not automatically
switch to hands-free mode:
> Depending on the type of mobile phone you
are using, it may be possible to continue the
conversation via the hands-free system.
Refer to the display on your mobile phone
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
187
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
and/or your mobile phone's operating
instructions.
> Press the button above the storage
compartment.
From hands-free system to mobile
phone
If you are making a call via the hands-free sys-
tem, it may be possible to continue the call via
the mobile phone, depending on your mobile
phone model. Refer to the display on your
mobile phone and/or your mobile phone's oper-
ating instructions.
Alternatively, you can deactivate the Bluetooth
link.
Depending on the type of mobile phone you are
using, it may occur that calls are switched from
the hands-free system to the mobile phone if
reception of the wireless network is poor.
Operation by voice
commands*
The concept
You can operate your mobile phone without
having to take a hand off the steering wheel.
During your entries, you will be guided in many
cases by announcements or questions.
The same prerequisites apply as for operation
via iDrive, refer to page 181.
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Saying commands
Activating the system
1. Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel.
A sound signal indicates that you can say
commands.
2. Say the command.
Ending/canceling operation by voice
commands
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
In dialogs where text is spoken, e.g. a name
rather than a command, canceling is only possi-
ble using the button on the steering wheel.
Having the possible commands read
aloud
The system recognizes specific commands
that must be pronounced exactly word for word.
You can have the possible commands for any
function read aloud to you:
Using alternative commands
Often there is more than a single command to
run a function, e.g.:
Digits from zero to nine are recognized.
You can say each digit individually or group
them into a sequence to accelerate the input.
{...}Say the specified commands word for
word.
{{...}} Indicates responses of the system.
{Cancel}.
{Help}
{Dial name} or {Name}.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Telephoning
188
Example: dialing phone numbers
Start the dialog:
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Adjusting the volume of the
instructions
You can adjust the volume for the instructions
from the system:
Turn the button during an instruction.
This volume for the instructions is maintained,
even if the other audio sources are set to mini-
mum volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
The connection to the desired subscriber is
established.
Correcting phone numbers
After the last spoken sequence of digits has
been repeated by the system, you can delete
this sequence of digits.
The command {Correct number} can be
repeated as often as you like.
Deleting phone numbers
All digits entered up to this point are deleted.
Voice phone book
The phone book entries can be called up auto-
matically from your mobile phone's memory.
Selecting an entry
The connection to the phone number of the
selected entry is established.
Redialing
The {Redial} command calls up "Redial".
Command Voice control response
{Dial number}{{Please say the number}}
e.g. {123 456 7890} Depending on your equipment version:
{{123 456 7890. Continue?}} or
{{123 456 7890. And next?}}
{Dial}{{Dialing number}}
1. {Dial number}.
2. Say the phone number.
For telephone calls abroad, say {Plus}
and then the country code.
3. {Dial}.
{Correct number}.
The digits are deleted.
{Delete}.
1. {Dial name}.
The dialog for selecting an entry is
opened.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
189
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Notes
Important for voice commands
For voice commands, bear in mind the follow-
ing:
> Pronounce the commands smoothly and at
normal volume, avoiding excessive empha-
ses and pauses.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass roof
closed to prevent interference from outside
noise.
> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
Inserting/removing snap-in
adapter*
1. Press area 1 around the button and take off
the cover
*
.
2. Insert the snap-in adapter in the front and
press it downward until it engages.
To remove the snap-in adapter:
Press area 1.
Inserting mobile phone
1. If applicable, remove the protective cap
from the mobile phone's antenna connector
so that the mobile phone can engage in the
snap-in adapter.
2. With its buttons facing upward, slide the
mobile phone up towards the electrical con-
tact points and press it downward until it
engages.
The mobile phone's battery is charged as soon
as the vehicle is in radio readiness or the steer-
ing is unlocked.
To conserve battery power, you should
avoid using the mobile phone when the
ignition is switched off.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Telephoning
190
Removing mobile phone
Press the button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
191
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
BMW Assist
BMW Assist provides you with various services.
For example, the position data of your vehicle
can be transmitted to the BMW Assist
Response Center if an Emergency Request
*
has been sent.
Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi-
vidually agreed contract.
After your contract has expired, the
BMW Assist system will be deactivated by the
BMW Assist Response Center without you hav-
ing to visit a BMW center. After the BMW Assist
system has been deactivated, no BMW Assist
service will be available. The BMW Assist sys-
tem can be reactivated by a BMW center after a
new contract has been signed.
Requirements
You can use BMW Assist when the following
requirements are met:
> The installed BMW Assist system is logged
on to a mobile phone network. This network
must be capable of transmitting the ser-
vices.
> To transmit position data, the vehicle must
be able to determine the current position.
> To activate and update BMW Assist, a GPS
signal must be available.
> You have subscribed to BMW Assist with
your BMW center or with the BMW Assist
Response Center. Enabling must have
been completed.
> BMW Assist is activated, refer to page 196.
Offered services
The following services are available via
BMW Assist:
> Emergency Request, refer to page 229:
When you press the SOS button, a connec-
tion is established to the BMW Assist
Response Center. The BMW Assist
Response Center contacts you and takes
further steps to help you.
> Automatic Collision Notification:
Under certain conditions, a connection is
established to the BMW Assist Response
Center after a serious accident. If possible,
the BMW Assist Response Center contacts
you and takes further steps to help you.
> Enhanced Roadside Assistance:
You can call BMW Roadside Assistance
*
should you require help in the event of a
breakdown. If possible, the vehicle data and
position data are transmitted during this
call.
> Customer Relations:
For all information related to your vehicle
you can be connected with BMW Customer
Relations.
> BMW TeleServices
*
:
Data on your vehicle's service status or
required inspections are transmitted to your
BMW center either automatically before a
service due date or when you request a
BMW service appointment.
> Remote Door Unlock:
Contact the BMW Assist Response Center
if your remote control or key is not available
and you would like to have the vehicle
unlocked.
> Stolen Vehicle Recovery:
After you report your vehicle stolen with the
police, call the BMW Assist Response Cen-
ter to determine its position.
In addition, optional services can be provided to
you, such as the Concierge service or informa-
tion on directions, traffic or the weather. You
can use Critical Calling to activate a limited
number of calls via the BMW Assist Response
Center, e.g. when you do not have your mobile
phone with you.
Press the SOS button in order to contact the
BMW Assist Response Center, see below.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
BMW Assist
192
You can also access the BMW Assist Concierge
service via the Internet.
Characteristics of the offered services
The following characteristics apply to the ser-
vices:
> The services offered are country-specific.
> Voice contact is established or data are
transferred, depending on the equipment
and the country. In some countries, it is
possible to do both.
> The data transmitted can be vehicle data,
for example, your current position or the
Condition Based Service CBS data.
Using services
Contacting the BMW Assist Response
Center
You can contact the BMW Assist Response
Center via the SOS button.
1. Briefly press the cover flap to open.
The arrangement of the switches and indi-
cator lamps varies slightly among vehicle
equipment versions.
2. Press the button for at least 2 seconds.
The BMW Assist Response Center will connect
you with BMW Roadside Assistance.
Roadside Assistance
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select
"Communication".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "BMW Assist" is selected and press
the controller.
4. Select "Roadside Assistance" and press
the controller.
If the current location can be determined,
the current vehicle position is displayed.
5. Select "Start service" and press the con-
troller.
The BMW Assist Response Center will connect
you with BMW Roadside Assistance.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
193
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
BMW TeleServices*
Automatic BMW Teleservice Call*
The data on the service status of your vehicle or
on required inspections are transmitted auto-
matically prior to the due date. You can check
when the BMW center was notified.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Service Info" and press the control-
ler.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Service requirements" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Auto Request" and press the con-
troller.
Manual BMW Teleservice Call
You can transmit data regarding your vehicle's
service status to your BMW center when you
wish to arrange a service appointment.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select
"Communication".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "BMW Assist" is selected and press
the controller.
4. Select "Service Request" and press the
controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
BMW Assist
194
5. Select "Start service" and press the con-
troller.
The service-relevant data are transmitted. Your
BMW center will contact you to arrange a ser-
vice appointment.
Displaying and updating* BMW
TeleServices
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press
the controller.
5. Select "Enabled TeleServices" and press
the controller.
The activated BMW TeleServices are dis-
played.
6. Select "Options" and press the controller.
7. Select "Update services" and press the
controller.
Contacting BMW Customer Relations
For all information related to your vehicle you
can call BMW Customer Relations.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select
"Communication".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "BMW Assist" is selected and press
the controller.
4. Select "Customer Relations".
5. Press the controller.
6. Select "Start service" and press the con-
troller.
The BMW Assist Response Center will connect
you with BMW Customer Relations.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
195
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Concierge service*
When you call the BMW Assist Concierge, you
can obtain information about, e.g., current
events, gas stations or hotels, as well as receive
the corresponding telephone numbers and
addresses. Many hotels can be booked directly
through the BMW Assist Concierge service.
Concierge service requires additional enabling
by the BMW Assist Response Center.
Calling the Concierge
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select
"Communication".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "BMW Assist" is selected and press
the controller.
4. Select "Concierge" and press the control-
ler.
5. Select "Start service" and press the con-
troller.
The BMW Assist Response Center will connect
you with a BMW Assist Concierge.
Displaying transmitted data
Select a received message, if applicable, and
press the controller.
Dialing a phone number or transferring
an address for destination guidance
1. Select "Options" and press the controller.
2. Select a menu item:
> Press "Call" to make a telephone call. A pre-
requisite for this is that your Bluetooth
mobile phone has been paired with the
vehicle.
> Press "Select as destination" to transfer the
address to the navigation system for desti-
nation guidance.
Adapting BMW Assist
Displaying and updating services
If the services offered by BMW Assist change,
you will be notified. In that event you may
update the service functions.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
BMW Assist
196
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service set-
tings" is selected and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Enabled Assist services" is selected
and press the controller.
The currently available BMW Assist ser-
vices are displayed.
6. If necessary, select "Options" and press the
controller.
7. Select "Update services" and press the
controller.
Activating BMW Assist
BMW Assist must be activated to use the ser-
vices.
Requirements
> Make sure that the vehicle can determine its
current location. Reception is best when
you have an unobstructed view to the sky.
> Leave vehicle ignition switched on during
the activation process.
Activating
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service set-
tings" is selected and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
197
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
until "Enabled Assist services" is selected
and press the controller.
6. Select "Enable services" and press the con-
troller.
BMW Assist is activated and data exchange
with the BMW Assist Response Center
begins.
Activation takes a few minutes. Progress status
is displayed on the Control Display. If you open
another menu, the activation process continues
in the background.
Displaying vehicle data
When BMW Assist is enabled, you can have the
system display the Telematics ID. The
Telematics ID identifies your vehicle. These
data are transmitted to your BMW center.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press
the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
BMW Assist
198
until "Assist profile" is selected and press
the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
199
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
181
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Activating/deactivating the Bluetooth
link
The use of Bluetooth technology is not
permitted in all countries. Observe all
applicable local regulations. Temporarily deac-
tivate the Bluetooth link between the vehicle
and the mobile phone, if necessary.
If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you can no
longer operate the mobile phone via the vehicle,
and other devices with a Bluetooth interface
can be used in combination with the mobile
phone, e.g. a laptop.<
To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link
between the vehicle and your mobile phone:
1. Press the button to call up the start
menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
5. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top, select "Settings" and
press the controller.
6. Select "Bluetooth communication active"
and press the controller to activate or deac-
tivate the link.
The Bluetooth link is activated.
The Bluetooth link is deactivated.
Adjusting volume
Turn the knob during a call to select the desired
volume.
This volume for the hands-free system is main-
tained, even if the other audio sources are set to
minimum volume.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Operation via iDrive
You can operate the following functions using
iDrive:
> Accepting/rejecting calls
> Dialing phone numbers
> Selecting phone numbers from the phone
book
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
This section helps you maintain your car's
mobility by supplying important information
on vital topics including fuels and lubricants,
wheels and tires, service, maintenance and
roadside assistance.
Mobility
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Refueling
202
Refueling
Always switch off the engine before refu-
eling, otherwise, fuel cannot be added to
the tank and a message will be displayed.<
Take all precautionary measures and
observe all applicable regulations when
handling fuel. Do not carry any spare fuel con-
tainers in your vehicle. They can develop a leak
and cause an explosion or cause a fire in the
event of an accident.<
Fuel filler door
Opening
1. Open fuel filler door. To do so, lightly press
the rear edge.
2. Turn the gas cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the gas cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler door.
Closing
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly
hear a click.
Do not pinch the band attached to the
cap, otherwise the cap cannot be closed
properly and fuel vapors can escape. A mes-
sage will be displayed if the gas cap is loose or
missing.<
Manually releasing the fuel filler door
In the event of a malfunction, you can release
the fuel filler door manually:
1. Remove the cover from the right-hand side-
wall of the cargo bay.
2. Pull the button with the fuel pump symbol
down.
The fuel filler door is released.
Observe the following when refueling
When handling fuels, follow the safety
instructions provided at filling stations,
otherwise there is a risk of personal injury or
property damage.<
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com-
pletely into the filler pipe. Avoid lifting the filler
nozzle while filling the tank, as that would lead
to
> premature pump shutoff
> reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor recov-
ery system.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Fuel tank capacity
Approx. 14 US gallons/53 liters, including the
reserve capacity of 2.1 US gallons/8 liters.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Fuel specifications
Do not fill the tank with leaded fuel, as this
would cause permanent damage to the
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
203
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
catalytic converter.
Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel containing
85% ethanol, nor with FlexFuel. Otherwise the
engine and fuel supply system will be dam-
aged.<
Required fuel
Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91
This gasoline is highly recommended.
However, you may also use gasoline with less
AKI. The minimum AKI Rating is:
> 128i: 87
> 135i: 89
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat-
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Do not use any gasoline below the speci-
fied minimum fuel grade. Otherwise the
engine could be damaged.<
Use high-quality brands
Field experience has indicated significant dif-
ferences in fuel quality: volatility, composition,
additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale
in the United States and Canada. Fuels contain-
ing up to and including 10Ξ ethanol or other
oxygenates with up to 2.8 Ξ oxygen by weight,
that is, 15Ξ MTBE or 3Ξ methanol plus an
equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not void
the applicable warranties with respect to
defects in materials or workmanship.
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
driveability, starting and stalling problems
especially under certain environmental condi-
tions such as high ambient temperature and
high altitude.
Should you encounter driveability problems
which you suspect could be related to the fuel
you are using, we recommend that you respond
by switching to a recognized high-quality brand
such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier
Detergent Gasoline.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
204
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressures
Information for your safety
It is not merely the tires' service life, but also
driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving
safety that depend on the condition of the tires
and the maintenance of the specified tire pres-
sure.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
and correct it, if necessary: at least twice a
month and before starting long trips. If you fail
to observe this precaution you may be driving
on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condi-
tion that can not only compromise your vehi-
cle's driving stability, but also lead to tire dam-
age and the risk of an accident. Do not drive
with deflated, i.e. flat tires, except when using
Run-Flat Tires. A flat tire will seriously impair
your vehicle's handling and braking response.
Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to loss of
control over the vehicle.<
Checking pressure
Only check tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after a maximum of
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are
warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.
After correcting the tire inflation pressure,
reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor,
refer to page 86, or the Flat Tire Monitor, refer
to page 84.<
Inflation pressure specifications
The tables below provide all the correct inflation
pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient
temperature.
The inflation pressures apply to the tire
sizes approved and tire brands recom-
mended by BMW; a list of these is available
from your BMW center.<
For correct identification of the right tire infla-
tion pressures, observe the following:
> Tire sizes for your vehicle
> Load conditions
> Maximum allowable driving speed
Tire inflation pressures for driving up to
100 mph or 160 km/h
For normal driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h
and to achieve optimum driving comfort, adjust
pressures to the respective tire inflation pres-
sures listed on the following pages in the col-
umns for traveling speeds up to a maximum of
100mph or 160km/h.
These tire inflation pressures can also be found
on the driver's-side door post when the driver's
door is open.
The maximum permissible speed for
these tire pressures is 100 mph or
160 km/h. Do not exceed this speed, otherwise
tire damage and accidents could occur.<
Tire inflation pressures for driving
above 100 mph or 160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph or 160 km/h, adjust
pressures to the respective tire inflation pres-
sures listed on the following pages in the col-
umns for traveling speeds including those
exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/h. Otherwise tire
damage and accidents could occur.<
Observe all national and local maximum speed
limits, otherwise violations of the laws could
occur.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
205
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 128i
Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 135i
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph / 160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100mph / 160km/h
All pressure specifications in
the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S 32/220 38/260 32/220 35/240 35/240 42/290
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S
205/50 R 17 89 H M+S
32/220 35/240 32/220 35/240 35/240 42/290
Front: 205/50 R 17 89 V 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 225/45 R 17 91 V - 35/240 - 35/240 - 42/290
Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y - 35/240 - 35/240 - 42/290
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 239.
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph / 160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100mph / 160km/h
All pressure specifications in
the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
205/50 R 17 89 H M+S 33/230 36/250 33/230 36/250 38/260 42/290
Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y 36/250 - 36/250 - 38/260 -
Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y - 36/250 - 36/250 - 42/290
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 239.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
206
Convertible: tire inflation pressures for the 128i
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100mph / 160km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in
the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
without Sports package
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 32/220 35/240 32/220 35/240 32/220 39/270
205/50 R 17 89 H M+S 32/220 38/260 32/220 35/240 35/240 42/290
Front: 205/50 R 17 89 V 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 225/45 R 17 91 V - 35/240 - 35/240 - 39/270
Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y 35/240 - 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y - 39/270 - 35/240 - 39/270
with Sports package
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 32/220 35/240 32/220 35/240 32/220 39/270
205/50 R 17 89 H M+S 32/220 38/260 33/230 36/250 36/250 44/300
Front: 205/50 R 17 89 V 32/220 - 33/230 - 36/250 -
Rear: 225/45 R 17 91 V - 35/240 - 36/250 - 44/300
Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y 35/240 - 33/230 - 36/250 -
Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y - 39/270 - 36/250 - 44/300
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 239.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
207
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Convertible: tire inflation pressures for the 135i
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph / 160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100mph / 160km/h
All pressure specifications in
the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
205/50 R 17 89 H M+S 33/220 38/260 32/220 35/240 36/250 42/290
Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y 39/270 - 39/270 - 39/270 -
Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y - 39/270 - 39/270 - 39/270
with Sports package
205/50 R 17 89 H M+S 33/220 38/260 33/230 36/250 38/260 45/310
Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y 39/270 - 38/260 - 39/270 -
Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y - 39/270 - 38/260 - 45/310
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 239.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
208
Tire identification marks
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire
makes it easier to identify and choose the right
tires.
Tire size
Speed code letter
Q = up to 100 mph or 160 km/h
T = up to 118 mph or 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph or 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph or 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph or 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph or 300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the US Department of Transportation.
DOT code:
Tire age
The manufacturing date of tires is contained in
the tire coding: DOT … 0708 means that the
tire was manufactured in week 7 of 2008.
BMW recommends that you replace all tires
after 6 years at most, even if some tires may last
for 10 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Tread wear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Tread wear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition
to these grades.<
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1γ) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, how-
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteris-
tics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test sur-
faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac-
teristics.<
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
e.g.
Nominal width in mm
Aspect ratio in Ξ
Radial belt construction
Rim diameter in inches
Load rating,
not on ZR tires
Speed code letter, in
front of the R on ZR tires
225/45 R
1
791 V
e.g.
Manufacturer's
code for tire make
Tire size and
tire design
Tire age
DOT xxxx xxx 0708
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
209
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either sep-
arately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.<
RSC – Run-Flat Tires
You will recognize Run-Flat Tires by a circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side
of the tire, refer to page 210.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than sum-
mer tires.
XL
Designation for specially reinforced tires.
Tire condition
Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear,
signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged
in the tread. Check the tread depth.
Minimum tread depth
The tire tread depth should not be below 1/8 in/
3 mm. At tread depths below 1/8 in/3 mm there
is a n increased risk of high-speed hydro planing,
even when only small amounts of water are
present on the road surface.
The tread depth should not drop below 1/8 in/
3 mm, although, for example, European legisla-
tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of
1/16 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 1/8 in/
3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed
hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of
water are present on the road surface.
When winter tires wear down past a tread depth
of 1/6 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less
suitable for winter conditions. In the interest of
safety, new tires should be installed.
Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove
are distributed around the tire's circumference;
the letters TWI, for Tread Wear Indicator, on the
tire's sidewalls identify tires that incorporate
these wear indicators. Once the tire tread has
worn down to the wear indicators, the tire has
worn to a depth of 1/16 in/1.6 mm.
Wheel/tire damage
Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels,
tires and suspension parts to be more suscep-
tible to road hazard and consequential dam-
ages.
Unusual vibrations encountered during normal
vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or
some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam-
ple, be caused by driving over curbs. The same
applies to any other abnormal road behavior,
such as pulling severely to the right or left.
In these cases, reduce speed immedi-
ately and have wheels and tires thor-
oughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the
nearest BMW center or tire shop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. If necessary,
have the vehicle towed there.
Otherwise, tire damage can pose a lethal hazard
to vehicle occupants and other road users.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
210
Tire age
For various reasons, such as the development
of brittleness, BMW recommends tire replace-
ment after no more than 6 years, regardless of
the actual wear of the tires.
The manufacturing date of tires is contained in
the tire coding:
DOT ... 0708 means that the tire was manufac-
tured in week 7 of 2008.
Run-Flat Tires
The symbol identifying Run-Flat Tires is a circle
with the letters RSC on the sidewall.
Run-Flat Tires comprise a conditionally self-
supporting tire and a special rim. The reinforce-
ment in the sidewalls ensures that the tire can
continue to be used subject to certain restric-
tions, even if depressurized.
For information on continuing to drive with a flat
tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire on page 85.
New wheels and tires
Have new wheels and tires installed only
by your BMW center or tire shop that
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel. If this
work is not carried out properly, there is a dan-
ger of subsequent damage and related safety
hazards. Make sure that the new wheels are bal-
anced.<
Retreaded tires
BMW recommends that you do not use
retreaded tires, since driving safety may
be impaired. The causes for this include poten-
tially different tire casing structures and often
wide variations in tire age, which can result in a
limited service life.<
Correct wheels and tires
When mounting new tires or changing over
from summer to winter tires and vice versa,
mount Run-Flat Tires for your own safety. In the
event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. Your
BMW center will be glad to advise you.
BMW recommends that you use only
wheel and tire combinations that BMW
has tested and approved for your particular
vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufac-
turing tolerances mean that even wheels and
tires with identical official size ratings could
actually have different dimensions, which could
lead to body contact and thus to severe acci-
dents. If non-approved wheels and tires are
used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability,
and therefore cannot guarantee their driving
safety.<
You can inquire about the right wheel/tire com-
bination at your BMW center.
The correct combination of wheels and tires is
also necessary to ensure reliable operation of
various vehicle systems such as ABS, DSC or
FTM.
To maintain good handling and vehicle
response, use only tires of a single brand and
tread configuration. After a tire has been dam-
aged, mount the previous wheel and tire combi-
nation again as soon as possible.
Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM electronics
When mounting new tires or changing over
from summer to winter tires, or vice versa, only
use wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise the
Tire Pressure Monitor may not be able to detect
a puncture, refer to page 87. Your BMW center
will be glad to advise you.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
211
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Recommended tire brands
Certain makes of tire are recommended by
BMW for each tire size. They are marked with a
clearly visible BMW designation on the sidewall
of the tire.
When properly used, these tires meet the high-
est standards in terms of safety and handling
characteristics.
Special characteristics of winter tires
BMW recommends winter tires for use in cold
winter driving conditions. Although all-season
M+S tires provide better winter traction than
summer tires, they generally fail to provide the
same levels of cold-weather performance as
winter tires.
Pay attention to speed
Always comply with the speed limit for the
winter tires mounted on your car; failure
to do so could result in tire damage and acci-
dents.<
If the car is capable of speeds higher than that
permitted for the winter tires, a label stating the
maximum permitted speed for the mounted
tires must be displayed in your field of view.
Specialist tire dealers and your BMW center
can supply these labels.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Always
protect tires against all contact with oil, grease
and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres-
sure indicated on the sidewall of the tire.
Swapping wheels between axles
BMW advises against swapping wheels
between the front and rear axles, even if all tires
have the same size, as this could impair driving
characteristics. If the tires are of mixed sizes,
swapping wheels between the axles is not per-
missible.
Snow chains*
Only certain fine-link snow chains have been
tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and
recommended. Consult your BMW center for
more information. Snow chains must be
mounted in pairs and on the rear wheels only.
Observe the manufacturer's instructions when
mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed
of 30 mph/50 km/h with chains.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if
snow chains are mounted, otherwise the
instrument might issue an incorrect reading.
When driving with snow chains, you may find it
helpful to activate DTC temporarily, refer to
page 82.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Under the hood
212
Under the hood
Do not work on the car unless you pos-
sess the necessary technical knowledge.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide-
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
only by a BMW center or by a workshop that
work according to BMW repair procedures with
correspondingly trained personnel. If this work
is not carried out properly, there is a danger of
subsequent damage and related safety haz-
ards.<
Hood
Releasing
Pull the lever.
Opening
To avoid damage, make sure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield
before you open the engine compartment. Do
not open the engine hood before the engine has
cooled down, otherwise injuries may result.<
Press the release handle and open the hood.
Closing
Close the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/
40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard
to engage.
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear, otherwise injuries may
result.
If you see any signs while driving your vehicle
that the hood is not completely closed, stop at
once and close it securely.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
213
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Important parts of the engine compartment
1 Expansion tank for coolant, refer to
page 216
2 Washer fluid filler neck for headlamp clean-
ing system and window washer system,
refer to page 64
3 Jump-starting connection, refer to
page 230
4 Fluid filler neck for engine oil, refer to Add-
ing engine oil, page 215
Engine oil
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
driving style and driving conditions.
Checking oil level
Your car is equipped with an electronic oil-level
monitor.
For a precise measurement and display of the
oil level, it is necessary that the engine be at
operating temperature, i.e. after uninterrupted
driving for at least approx. 6.5 miles/10 km. You
can have the oil level displayed while you are
driving, or while the vehicle is at a standstill on a
level surface and the engine is running.
Display in the instrument cluster
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol is shown in the display, accompa-
nied by the word "OIL".
2. Press button 2.
The oil level is checked and the reading dis-
played.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Under the hood
214
Possible displays
1 Oil level OK
2 Oil level is being checked.
This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at
a standstill on a level surface, or about
5 minutes while the car is on the move.
3 Oil level down to minimum:
Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no
more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to
Adding engine oil on page 215.
4 Oil level is too high.
Too much oil will harm the engine.
Have the vehicle checked without
delay.<
5 The oil level sensor is defective.
Do not add engine oil. You can continue
your journey. Note the newly calculated dis-
tance remaining to the next oil service, refer
to page 217. Have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Display via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Service" and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Service requirements" is selected and
press the controller.
6. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the second field from the top. Turn the con-
troller until "Engine oil level" is selected and
press the controller.
The oil level is displayed.
To exit the display immediately:
Select and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
215
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Possible messages
> "Engine oil level O.K."
> "No measurement available: Updating
engine oil level measurement..."
The engine oil level is measured. This can
take about 3 minutes if the car is at a stand-
still on a level surface and the engine is run-
ning, and about 5 minutes while the car is on
the move.
> "Oil level at the minimum! Refill with 1 quart
of engine oil."
Add 1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil at the
next opportunity, but no more than that,
refer also to Adding engine oil below.
> "Engine oil level too high"
Too much oil will harm the engine.
Have the vehicle checked without
delay.<
> "Please observe recalculated service inter-
val for engine oil"
Do not add engine oil. You can continue
your journey. Note the newly calculated dis-
tance remaining to the next oil service, refer
to page 217. Have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Adding engine oil
Do not add 1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil until a
corresponding message is shown on the Con-
trol Display.
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km,
otherwise the engine could be dam-
aged.<
Keep oils, greases, etc. out of the reach of
children and comply with the relevant
warnings on the containers. Otherwise, health
hazards may result.<
Oil change
Have oil changed only at your BMW center or at
a workshop that works according to BMW
repair procedures with correspondingly trained
personnel.
Specified engine oils
The quality of the engine oil selected has critical
significance for the operation and service life of
an engine. BMW continuously approves spe-
cific oils after confirming their suitability for use
in its vehicles with extensive testing.
Do not use oil additives as these may
cause engine damage.<
Only use approved BMW High Performance
Synthetic Oil.
If BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil is not
available, you can add small quantities of other
synthetic oils in between oil changes. Only use
oils with the API SM specification or higher.
Your BMW center will be glad to answer
any questions regarding BMW High Per-
formance Synthetic Oil or approved synthetic
oils.<
You can also call BMW of North America at
1-800-831-1117 or visit the website
www.bmwusa.com to obtain this information.
Viscosity ratings
Viscosity is a measure of an oil's flow rating and
is categorized in SAE classes.
Selecting the appropriate SAE class depends
on the regional climatic conditions in which you
normally drive your BMW.
Approved oils belong to the 5W-40 and
5W-30 classes.<
These oils can be used for driving at all outside
temperatures.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Under the hood
216
Coolant
Do not add coolant to the cooling system
when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant
can cause burns.<
Coolant consists of half water and half additive.
Not all commercially available additives are suit-
able for your BMW. Ask your BMW center for
suitable additives.
Only use suitable additives, otherwise
engine damage may result. Because
additives are harmful to your health, it is impor-
tant to follow the instructions on the contain-
ers.<
Comply with the appropriate environ-
mental protection regulations when dis-
posing of coolant additives.<
Checking coolant level
1. Do not open the engine hood before the
engine has cooled down.
2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank a little
counterclockwise to allow any accumulated
pressure to escape, then continue turning
to open.
3. The coolant level is correct if it is between
the maximum and minimum marks in the
filler neck, refer also to the diagram next to
the filler neck.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
6. Have the reason for the coolant loss elimi-
nated as soon as possible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
217
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Maintenance
BMW Maintenance System
The BMW Maintenance System supports the
preservation of the traffic and operating safety
of your BMW. The objective is to optimize
efforts with respect to minimal vehicle mainte-
nance costs.
If and when you come to sell your BMW, a com-
prehensive record of servicing will prove a sig-
nificant benefit.
Condition Based Service CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take the differ-
ent driving conditions of your BMW into
account. Condition Based Service uses this to
determine the current and future service
requirements. By letting you define a service
and maintenance regimen that reflects your
own individual requirements, the system builds
the basis for trouble-free driving.
On the Control Display, you can have the
remaining times or distances for selected main-
tenance tasks and any legally prescribed dates
displayed, refer to page 72:
> Engine oil
> Brake pads: separately for front and rear
> Brake fluid
> Vehicle check
> Legally mandated inspections depending
on local regulations
Service data in the remote control
Your vehicle continuously stores service-
requirement information in the remote control
while you are driving. Your BMW Service Advi-
sor can read out this data from the remote con-
trol unit, and propose an optimized mainte-
nance approach. Whenever you take your car in
for servicing you should therefore hand your
BMW Service Advisor the remote control unit
that you last used.
Make sure that the date is always set cor-
rectly, refer to page 76; otherwise the
effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS
is not assured.<
Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
for additional information on service require-
ments.
BMW recommends that you have service
and repair operations performed at your
BMW center.
Take the time to ensure that these service pro-
cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi-
cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models and Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models. These entries
verify that your vehicle has received the speci-
fied regular maintenance.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Maintenance
218
Socket for On-Board
Diagnosis OBD
Primary components that make up exhaust
emissions can be checked by a device via the
OBD socket.
This socket is located on the driver's side to the
left, on the bottom of the instrument panel
underneath a cover.
Exhaust emission values
The warning lamp lights up:
The exhaust emission values have
worsened. Have the car checked as
soon as possible.
Canadian models display this warning
lamp.
The lamp flashes under certain conditions. This
indicates excessive misfiring in the engine. If
this happens, you should reduce your speed
and visit your nearest BMW center as soon as
possible. Severe engine misfiring can quickly
lead to serious damage of emissions-related
components, especially the catalytic converter.
The warning lamp comes on if the gas
cap is not properly tightened and the
OBD system assumes that fuel vapor
is escaping. If the gas cap is then tightened, the
warning lamp should go out within a few days.
Event data recorders
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or sev-
eral measuring or diagnostic modules or a
device for recording or sending certain vehicle
data or information. In addition, if you have
signed a service contract for BMW Assist, cer-
tain vehicle data may be transmitted or
recorded in order to facilitate the corresponding
services.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
219
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Care
Care products
Regular cleaning and care contributes signifi-
cantly to the value retention of your BMW.
BMW recommends cleaning and caring for your
vehicle with products that are approved by
BMW for this purpose.
Your BMW center will be happy to advise you on
the products and services available for cleaning
and caring for your BMW.
Original BMW CareProducts have been
material tested, laboratory checked and
proven in the field, and offer optimal care and
protection for your vehicle.<
Do not use cleaners that contain alcohol
or solvents as these may result in dam-
age.<
Cleaning agents can contain substances
that are dangerous or hazardous to your
health. Therefore, follow the warning and safety
instructions on the packaging. When cleaning
inside the vehicle, always open the doors or
windows of the vehicle. In enclosed areas, pro-
vide for sufficient ventilation. Only use products
designed for cleaning vehicles.<
Exterior care
Washing the vehicle
Especially during the winter months,
ensure that the vehicle is washed more
frequently. Heavy soiling and road salt can lead
to vehicle damage.<
After washing the vehicle, apply the
brakes briefly to dry them, otherwise
water can reduce braking efficiency over the
short term and brake discs can corrode.<
Automatic car washes
Preference should be given to cloth car washes.
Do not use high-pressure car washes,
otherwise water may drip into the vehicle
around the windows.<
Before driving into a car wash, ensure that it is
suitable for your BMW. Check the following:
> Dimensions of your vehicle, refer to
page 237.
> If necessary: fold in the exterior mirrors,
refer to page 52
> Maximum permissible tire width
> In convertibles, do not treat the convertible
top with wax. Ensure that a program is avail-
able that does not apply wax or is designed
specifically for convertibles.
Preparations before driving into an automatic
car wash:
> Unscrew rod antenna
*
> Deactivate the rain sensor
*
to avoid unin-
tentional activation of the wipers.
> Remove additional attachments, e.g.
spoiler or telephone antennas, if there is a
possibility that they could be damaged.
Automatic transmission
Before driving into an automatic car wash, per-
form the following steps to ensure that the vehi-
cle can roll:
1. Insert the remote control, even with conve-
nient access, into the ignition lock.
2. Engage transmission position N.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Switch off the engine.
5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock
so that the vehicle can roll.
Steam jets / high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, ensure that you maintain suffi-
cient clearance to the vehicle and do not exceed
a temperature of 1407/606.
Insufficient clearance or excessive pressure or
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Care
220
temperature can lead to component damage or
water penetration. Follow the operating instruc-
tions of the high-pressure washer.<
When using high-pressure washers, do
not spray against the sensors and cam-
eras, e.g. of the Park Distance Control or Rear
View Camera, for an extended period and main-
tain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.<
Manual car wash
When washing the vehicle by hand, use large
quantities of water and car shampoo if neces-
sary. Clean the vehicle with a sponge or wash-
ing brush, applying light pressure only.
Before cleaning the windshield, deacti-
vate the rain sensor or switch off the igni-
tion to prevent unintentional activation of the
wipers.<
Observe local regulations pertaining to
washing vehicles by hand.<
Headlamps
Do not rub them dry and do not use abrasive or
corrosive cleaning agents.
Remove contamination, such as insects, by
soaking with shampoo or insect remover and
then rinsing with plenty of water.
Thaw ice with a windshield de-icer and do not
use an ice scraper.
Windows
Clean the inside and outside surfaces of the
windows and the mirrors with window cleaner.
Do not clean the mirrors with cleaners
containing quartz.<
Wiper blades
Clean with soapy water and replace regularly to
avoid streaking.
Wax and preservative residue and con-
tamination on the window can lead to
streaking when operating the windshield wip-
ers, leading to premature wear of the wiper
blades and causing the rain sensor to malfunc-
tion.<
Convertible top care
The appearance and life of the convertible top
depend on proper care and operation.
Follow these instructions:
> Do not fold the convertible top into the con-
vertible top box when the top is wet or fro-
zen, as this may cause water spots, mold
stains or chafed areas.
> If water spots occur on the inside headliner
despite precautions, remove them using a
microfiber cloth and interior cleaner.
> If the vehicle is parked in enclosed areas for
extended periods, ensure that there is suffi-
cient ventilation.
> Remove bird droppings immediately, as
their corrosive ingredients attack the con-
vertible top and damage the rubber seals.
To remove stains from the convertible
top, do not use stain removers, paint thin-
ners, solvents, benzine or similar substances.
These substances may damage the rubber
parts. Improper care and cleaning may cause
the convertible top and convertible top seams
to become leaky.<
To remove heavy soiling, use a special convert-
ible top cleaner.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions for use.
After washing the convertible top three to five
times, treat it with an impregnating agent.
Paintwork care
Regular care contributes to value retention and
protects the paintwork against the long-term
effects of damaging substances.
Region-specific environmental influences can
damage the vehicle paintwork. Therefore, it is
important to adapt the frequency and scope of
car care accordingly.
Immediately remove very aggressive sub-
stances, e.g. spilled fuel, oil, grease, tree resin
or bird droppings, to prevent damage to the
paintwork.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
221
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Repairing paintwork damage
Immediately repair scratches or similar
damage, such as that caused by stones
hitting the vehicle, where necessary to prevent
rusting.<
BMW recommends having paintwork damage
repaired by a professional paint repair work-
shop according to BMW specifications using
original BMW paint materials.
Preservation
A preservation treatment is necessary when
water no longer beads off of the clean paintwork
surface. Only use products for paintwork pres-
ervation that contain carnauba or synthetic
waxes.
Rubber seals
Treat only with water or rubber care products.
Do not use silicon-containing care prod-
ucts on rubber seals, otherwise noise and
damage could occur.<
Chrome parts
Carefully clean vehicle parts, such as the radia-
tor grill, door handles or window frames, with
copious quantities of water and a shampoo
additive. For additional treatment, use a chrome
polish.
Light-alloy wheels
For technical reasons, dust is generated during
braking that is deposited on the light-alloy
wheels. Remove the dust regularly using acid-
free rim cleaner.
Do not use aggressive, acidic, strongly
alkaline and abrasive cleaning agents or
steam jets over 1407/606, otherwise dam-
age may occur.<
Outside sensors / cameras
Keep the sensors and cameras on the
outside of the vehicle, e.g. those of Park
Distance Control, clean and free of ice to ensure
that they remain fully functional.<
Interior care
Upholstery / cloth trim
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner to
remove superficial dirt.
To treat severe stains, e.g. from beverages, use
a soft sponge or lint-free microfiber cloth in
combination with suitable interior cleaners. Fol-
low the instructions on the packaging.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams
using a sweeping motion. Avoid strong
rubbing.<
Opened Velcro fasteners on pants or
other articles of clothing can damage the
seat covers. Ensure that Velcro fasteners are
closed.<
Leather / leather trim
The leather used by BMW is a high quality
natural product. Slight irregularities in the
leather are a typical characteristic of natural
leather.<
Dust and road grit in the pores and folds of the
leather have an abrasive effect, leading to
increased wear and causing the leather surface
to become brittle prematurely. Therefore, fre-
quently clean the leather of dust using a cloth or
vacuum cleaner.
In particular, ensure that light-colored leather is
cleaned regularly as it has a tendency to soil
more easily.
Treat the leather twice a year using a leather
lotion as dirt and grease will gradually attack the
leather's protective layer.
Carpets / cargo bay
You can vacuum the carpets and floor mats or
clean them with interior cleaner if heavily soiled.
The floor mats can be removed for cleaning.
When replacing the mats, ensure that the seat
rails do not extend over the floor mats, as this
may damage the mats.
Lint on the floor mats occurs for technical rea-
sons and can be removed by vacuuming
repeatedly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Care
222
Interior plastic parts
> Imitation leather surfaces
> Lamp glasses
> Display pane of instrument cluster
> Matt parts
Clean with water and solvent-free plastic
cleaner if necessary.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood trim and fine wood parts with a
damp cloth. Wipe dry with a soft cloth.
Safety belts
Do not clean with cleaning agents as
these may destroy the fabric.<
Interior sensors / cameras
To clean interior sensors and cameras, e.g. of
the High-Beam Assistant, use a lint-free cloth
moistened with glass cleaner.
Displays
To clean the displays, e.g. of the radio or instru-
ment cluster, use a display cleaning cloth or a
soft, non-abrasive, lint-free cloth.
Avoid applying excessive pressure when
cleaning the displays, otherwise damage
may occur.<
Do not use chemical or abrasive house-
hold cleaning agents. Keep all types of
fluid away from the device. Otherwise, surfaces
or electrical components may be corroded or
damaged.<
CD/DVD drives
Do not use a cleaning CD, as it may dam-
age parts of the drive.<
Vehicle storage
If your vehicle is to be decommissioned for
longer than three months, your BMW center or
a workshop that operates according to BMW
specifications will be glad to advise you.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
223
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Replacing components
Onboard tool kit
The onboard tool kit is stored below the floor
mat in the cargo bay.
Wiper blades
1. Fold out the wiper arm and hold it.
2. Press together the locking spring, arrows 1,
and fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.
3. Take the wiper blade out of the catch mech-
anism, pulling the blade toward the front.
To avoid damage, make sure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield
before you open the engine compartment.<
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu-
tion to vehicle safety. They should, therefore,
be handled carefully. BMW recommends hav-
ing your BMW center perform any work that you
do not feel competent to perform yourself or
that is not described here.
Never touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare fingers, as even minute
amounts of contamination will burn into the
bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a
clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold
the bulb by its base.<
You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs
at your BMW center.
When working on electrical systems,
always begin by switching off the con-
sumer in question, otherwise short-circuits
could result. To avoid possible injury or equip-
ment damage when replacing bulbs, observe
any instructions provided by the bulb manufac-
turer.<
If the routine for changing a particular
bulb is not described here, please contact
your BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel.<
Light-emitting diodes LED
Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu-
cent lenses serve as the light source for many of
the controls and displays in your vehicle. These
light-emitting diodes, which operate using a
concept similar to that applied in conventional
lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-
emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers or expose the
eyes directly to the unfiltered light source
for several hours, otherwise this could cause
irritation to the retina.<
Xenon lamps*
These bulbs have a very long service life and are
highly unlikely to fail. If a xenon lamp fails never-
theless, switch on the fog lamps and continue
the journey with great care, provided that local
legislation does not prohibit this.
Have any work on the xenon lamp system,
including bulb replacements, performed
only by a BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. Otherwise, if
such work is carried out improperly, the high
voltage in the system presents the danger of
fatal injuries.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Replacing components
224
Removing the headlamp cover
1. Pull the wire brackets over the notches, see
arrows, and fold to the side.
2. Fold away the headlamp cover.
Be careful when attaching the headlamp
cover and ensure that both wire brackets
are securely in place, otherwise leaks could
occur and cause damage to the headlamp sys-
tem.<
Attach the headlamp cover in reverse order.
Halogen headlamps
Halogen low beams and high beams
H7 bulb, 55 watts
Always wear gloves and eye protection;
the atmosphere within the H7 bulb is
pressurized. Otherwise there is a risk of injury if
the bulb is damaged.<
The figure shows the right-hand headlamp.
1 High beams
2 Low-beam headlamps
1. Remove the headlamp cover.
2. Fold down the holding bracket.
3. Remove and replace the bulb.
4. Reattach the bulb holder with the notch at
the top.
5. Fold the holding bracket back up and let it
snap into place.
6. Attach the headlamp cover.
Parking lamps, roadside parking lamps
W5W bulb, 5 watts
1. Remove the headlamp cover.
The figure shows the right-hand headlamp.
2. Pull out the bulb holder.
3. Remove and replace the bulb.
4. Reinsert the bulb holder.
5. Attach the headlamp cover.
Xenon headlamps
Parking lamps, roadside parking
lamps, daytime running lamps
H8 bulb, 35 watts
The figure shows the right-hand headlamp.
1. Remove the headlamp cover.
2. Turn the bulb, see arrow, and remove it.
3. Pull off the connector and replace the bulb.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
225
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
4. Attach the connector, insert the bulb and
turn it all the way in the opposite direction.
5. Attach the headlamp cover.
Corner-illuminating lamps
H3 bulb, 55 watts
The figure shows the right-hand headlamp.
1. Remove the top headlamp cover, using the
screwdriver to push the detents to one side.
2. Turn the bulb holder, see arrow, and
remove it.
3. Slide the bulb out of the holder and pull off
the connector.
4. Replace the bulb and attach the connector.
5. Insert the bulb holder and turn it all the way
in the opposite direction.
6. Attach the headlamp cover.
Turn signals, front
PY21W Silver Vision bulb, 21 watts
The turn signal bulb can be changed via a cover
in the wheel arch.
1. Turn the respective wheel inwards.
2. Using a coin, turn both locks of the cover all
the way to the left, arrows 1, and remove the
cover.
3. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove
it, arrow 2.
4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the right for removal and
replacement.
5. Insert the bulb holder and lock it by turning
it to the right.
6. Attach the cover by positioning the bottom
edge first and then turning both locks all the
way to the right.
Tail lamps
> Turn signal:
PY21W bulb, 21 watts
> Backup lamp:
W16W bulb, 16 watts
> Brake lamps:
P21W bulb, 21 watts
> Brake Force Display lamp:
H21W bulb, 21 watts
1 Inner brake lamp
2 Outer brake lamp
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Replacing components
226
3 Lateral reflector
4 Roadside parking lamp and tail lamp LED
5 Reflector
6 Turn signal
7 Backup lamp
8 Brake Force Display lamp
Replacing tail lamps
Outer brake lamp
The outer brake lamp can be accessed through
a single socket.
The figure shows the right side of the vehicle.
1. Remove the cover from the panel of the
cargo bay.
2. Turn the bulb holder to the left, see arrow,
and remove it.
3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
4. Attach the bulb holder and turn it all the way
in the opposite direction.
5. Reattach the cover.
The roadside parking lamp/tail lamp uses
LED design. After replacing the bulb,
ensure that the bulb holder is properly seated,
otherwise the roadside parking lamp/tail lamp
may not work.<
Inner brake lamp, turn signal, backup
lamp and Brake Force Display lamp
The bulbs are integrated in a single bulb holder.
1. Remove the cover from the panel of the
cargo bay.
2. Detach the bulb holder by pressing
together the clips, see arrows, and remove
it.
3. Brake lamps and turn signal: apply gentle
pressure to the bulb while turning it to the
left for removal and replacement.
4. Backup lamp: pull the bulb out of the socket
and replace it.
5. Attach the bulb holder and let it snap into
place.
6. Reattach the cover.
License plate lamps and center brake
lamp
These lamps use LED technology for operation.
In the event of a malfunction, please contact
your BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel.
Changing wheels
Your BMW is equipped with Run-Flat Tires as
standard. This removes the need to change a
wheel immediately in the event of a puncture.
For information on continuing to drive with a
damaged tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire on
page 85.
The symbol identifying Run-Flat Tires is a circle
with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to
Run-Flat Tires, page 210.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
227
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
When mounting new tires or changing over
from summer to winter tires and vice versa,
mount Run-Flat Tires for your own safety. In the
event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. Your
BMW center will be glad to advise you. Refer
also to New wheels and tires, page 210.
The tools for changing wheels are avail-
able as optional accessories from your
BMW center.<
Jack mounting points
The jacking points are at the positions shown in
the illustration.
Vehicle battery
Battery care
The battery is 100% maintenance-free, the
electrolyte will last for the life of the battery
when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli-
mate. Your BMW center will be glad to advise in
all matters concerning the battery.
Charging the battery
Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the
terminals in the engine compartment with the
engine off. Connections, refer to Jump starting
on page 230.
Disposal
Have old batteries disposed of by your
BMW center or hand them in to a recy-
cling center. Maintain the battery in an upright
position for transport and storage. Always
secure the battery against tipping over during
transport.<
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, the functioning of
some equipment may be limited and require
reinitialization. Individual settings may likewise
have been lost and will have to be programmed:
> Time and date
These values must be updated, refer to
page 75.
> Radio
In some cases, stations may have to be
stored again, refer to page 156.
> Navigation system
Wait for the system to start, refer to
page 146.
> Glass roof
It may happen that the roof can only be
raised. The system must be initialized.
Please contact your BMW center.
> Seat and mirror memory
*
The positions must be stored again, refer to
page 49.
> Inside rearview mirror with digital compass
The system must be calibrated, refer to
page 106.
Fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a sub-
stitute of another color or amperage rating, oth-
erwise this could lead to a circuit overload, ulti-
mately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<
In the glove compartment
Accessing the fuse box:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Replacing components
228
1. Open the glove compartment.
2. Remove the damper, arrow 1, from the
lower holder by applying forward pressure.
3. Disengage the glove compartment by
pressing on both tabs, arrows 2, and fold it
down.
Spare fuses and a pair of plastic forceps are set
in holders on the distributor box.
Information on fuse assignment can be found
next to the distributor box.
After replacing a fuse, press the glove compart-
ment upward until it engages and reattach the
damper.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
229
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Giving and receiving assistance
Emergency Request*
Conditions for an Emergency Request:
> Full preparation package mobile phone: this
equipment makes it possible to send an
Emergency Request even if no mobile
phone is paired with the vehicle.
> BMW Assist is activated. Activating
BMW Assist, refer to page 196.
> Radio readiness is on.
> The BMW Assist system is logged on to a
mobile phone network.
> The Emergency Request system is opera-
ble.
Once your service contract for BMW Assist
expires, the BMW Assist system can be deacti-
vated by a BMW center without you having to
visit a workshop. Once the BMW Assist system
has been deactivated, Emergency Requests
are not possible. The BMW Assist system can
be reactivated by a BMW center after a new
contract has been signed.
Sending an Emergency Request
1. Briefly press the cover flap to open.
2. Press the SOS button for at least
2seconds.
The LED in the button lights up. As soon as the
voice connection to the BMW Assist Response
Center has been established, the LED flashes.
Once the BMW Assist Response Center has
received your Emergency Request, the
BMW Assist Response Center contacts you
and takes further steps to help you. Even if you
are unable to respond, the BMW Assist
Response Center will be able to initiate further
steps to assist you under certain conditions.
If the circumstances allow this, remain in the
vehicle until the connection has been estab-
lished. You will then be able to provide a
detailed description of the situation.
If the current location of your vehicle can be
determined, it will be transmitted to the BMW
Assist Response Center.
If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist
Response Center cannot be heard over the
hands-free system, it is possible that the
hands-free system is malfunctioning. You may
still be heard by the BMW Assist Response
Center, however.
Under certain conditions, an Emergency
Request is sent automatically immediately after
a severe accident. This Automatic Collision
Notification is not affected by the button being
pressed.
For technical reasons, the Emergency
Request service cannot be guaranteed
for the most unfavorable conditions.<
Roadside Assistance
The BMW Roadside Assistance is there to
assist you around the clock in the event of a
breakdown, including on weekends and public
holidays.
The phone numbers of the Roadside Assis-
tance in your home country can be found in the
Contact brochure.
In vehicles equipped with BMW Assist, you can
establish contact with BMW Roadside Assis-
tance for breakdown assistance directly via
iDrive, refer to page 192.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
230
First aid pouch*
Some of the articles contained in the first aid
pouch have a limited service life. Therefore,
check the expiration dates of the contents reg-
ularly and replace any items in good time, if nec-
essary.
The first aid pouch is located on the right-hand
side of the cargo bay in a storage area.
Warning triangle*
The warning triangle is located in a holder in the
luggage compartment lid. Press the tabs to take
it out.
Jump starting
If the car's own battery is flat, your BMW's
engine can be started by connecting two
jumper cables to another vehicle's battery. You
can also use the same method to help start
another vehicle. Only use jumper cables with
fully-insulated clamp handles.
Do not touch any electrically live parts
when the engine is running, or a fatal acci-
dent may occur. Carefully adhere to the follow-
ing sequence, both to prevent damage to one or
both vehicles, and to guard against possible
personal injuries.<
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other
vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts and
approximately the same capacitance in Ah.
This information can be found on the bat-
tery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi-
cle.
3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.
There must not be any contact between
the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise
there is a danger of shorting.<
Connecting jumper cables
Connect the jumper cables in the correct
order to prevent sparking at the battery,
which could cause injury.<
Your BMW has a jump-starting connection in
the engine compartment which acts as the bat-
tery's positive terminal, refer also to the Engine
compartment overview on page 213. The cap is
marked with +.
1. Pull the cap of the BMW jump-starting con-
nection up to remove.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the plus/+
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehi-
cle providing assistance.
3. Attach the second terminal clamp of the
plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal
of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of
the vehicle to be started.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
231
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the minus/–
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
battery or to an engine or body ground of
the assisting vehicle.
Your BMW has a special nut as body ground or
negative pole.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp of the
minus/– jumper cable to the negative termi-
nal of the battery or to the engine or body
ground of the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and
allow it to run for a few minutes at slightly
increased idle speed.
2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the
usual way.
If the first start attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before another attempt
in order to allow the discharged battery to
recharge.
3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing
the above connecting sequence.
If necessary, have the battery checked and
recharged.
Never use spray fluids to start the
engine.<
Tow-starting, towing away
Observe the applicable laws and regula-
tions for tow-starting and towing vehi-
cles.<
Do not transport any passengers other
than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.<
Using a tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting must always be carried
in the car. It can be screwed in at the front or
rear of the BMW.
It is stored with the onboard tool kit underneath
the floor mat in the cargo bay, refer to page 223.
Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the
tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. Avoid
lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift
the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise the tow
fitting and the vehicle could be damaged.<
Access to screw thread
Rectangular cover panel in bumper:
Press the arrow on the cover.
Front
Rear
Being towed
Make sure that the ignition is switched on,
refer to page 58, otherwise the low-beam
headlamps, tail lamps, turn signal indicators and
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
232
windshield wipers may be unavailable. Power
steering assistance is not available when the
engine is not running. Thus, braking and steer-
ing will require increased effort. Active steering
is not active and it will be necessary to turn the
steering wheel further.<
Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Automatic transmission
Selector lever in position N.
Changing the selector lever position, refer to
page 61.
Do not exceed a towing speed of 45 mph/
70 km/h and a towing distance of
90 miles/150 km, otherwise the automatic
transmission may be damaged.<
Towing methods
Do not lift the vehicle by a tow fitting or
body and chassis parts, otherwise dam-
age may result.<
With a tow bar
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the towed vehicle, otherwise it may
be impossible to maintain control.<
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossi-
ble to avoid mounting the tow bar at an angle,
please observe the following:
> Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be sharply limited during cornering.
> The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is
attached offset.
Attach the tow bar to the tow fittings only,
as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle
could result in damage.<
With a tow rope
When starting off in the towing vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated
stresses on vehicle components when
towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attach the tow rope to the tow fittings only, as
attaching it to other parts of the vehicle could
result in damage.<
With a tow truck
Have the BMW transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Do not tow the vehicle with just the rear axle
raised as this may cause the steering to turn.
Tow-starting
Avoid tow-starting the vehicle whenever possi-
ble; instead, jump-start the engine, refer to
page 230. Vehicles with a catalytic converter
should only be tow-started when the engine is
cold, vehicles with an automatic transmission
cannot be tow-started at all.
1. Switch on the hazard warning flashers,
comply with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 58.
3. Shift into 3rd gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch
depressed all the way and slowly release
the clutch. After the engine starts, immedi-
ately depress the clutch completely again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn-
ing flashers.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
233
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Reference
This chapter contains technical data, short
commands for the voice command system and
an index that will help you find information most
quickly.
Reference
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Technical data
236
Technical data
Engine data
128i 135i
Displacement cu in/cmμ 182.8/2,996 181.8/2,979
Number of cylinders 6 6
Maximum power output hp 230 300
at engine speed rpm 6,500 5,800
Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 200/270 300/407
at engine speed rpm 2,750 1,400 - 5,000
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Reference
237
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Dimensions
Coupe
All dimensions given in inches/mm.
Smallest turning circle dia.: 35 ft 1 in/10.7 m.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Technical data
238
Convertible
All dimensions given in inches/mm.
Smallest turning circle dia.: 35 ft 1 in/10.7 m.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Reference
239
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Weights
Coupe
Convertible
Capacities
128i 135i
Curb weight
> with manual transmission lbs/kg 3,252/1,475 3,373/1,530
> with automatic transmission lbs/kg 3,329/1,510 3,384/1,535
Approved gross weight
> with manual transmission lbs/kg 4,134/1,875 4,255/1,930
> with automatic transmission lbs/kg 4,211/1,910 4,266/1,935
Load lbs/kg 882/400 882/400
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,028/920 2,116/960
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,249/1,020 2,249/1,020
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 165/75
Cargo bay capacity cu ft/liters 13.1/370 13.1/370
128i 135i
Curb weight
> with manual transmission lbs/kg 3,494/1,585 3,660/1660
> with automatic transmission lbs/kg 3,571/1,620 3,671/1,665
Approved gross weight
> with manual transmission lbs/kg 4,398/1,995 4,564/2,070
> with automatic transmission lbs/kg 4,475/2,030 4,575/2,075
Load lbs/kg 904/410 904/410
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,050/930 2,149/975
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,447/1,110 2,447/1,110
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg – –
Cargo bay capacity cu ft/liters 9.1 - 10.7/260 - 305 9.1 - 10.7/260 - 305
Notes
Fuel tank: US gal/liters approx. 14.0/53 Fuel grade: page 203
including reserve of US gal/liters approx. 2.1/8.0
Window washer system For more details: page 64
including headlamp washers US qt/liters approx. 6.3/6.0
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice command system
240
Short commands for the voice command
system
With short commands you can carry out certain
functions directly, regardless of which menu
item is selected. Here are the important short
commands for the voice command system.
Communication
Navigation
*
Function Command
To open phone 183 {Phone}
To dial phone number 183 {Dial number}
To display phone book 183 {A to Z}
To select from phone book 183 {Call ...} or
{Dial name}
To display "Top 8" 183 {Top 8}
To redial 183 {Redial}
To display "Received calls" 183 {Received calls}
To display "Missed calls" 183 {Missed calls}
To display "Bluetooth" 177 {Bluetooth}
To open "BMW Service" services 192 {BMW Service}
Function Command
To open navigation 129 {Navigation}
To display current position 144 {Current position}
To open "Enter address" 123 {Enter address}
To open "New destination" 123 {New destination}
To display "Input map" 128 {Input map}
To open "Information" 129 {Info menu}
To display address book 131 {Address book} or
{From address book}
To display destination list 130 {Destination list}
To switch on destination guidance 136 {Start guidance}
To switch off destination guidance 136 {Stop guidance}
To display route criteria 134 {Route preference}
To switch on voice instructions 140 {Navigation info on}
To switch off voice instructions 140 {Navigation info off}
To repeat voice instructions 140 {Repeat navigation info}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Reference
241
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Onboard info
Entertainment
To show arrow display 137 {Arrow display}
To display map 138 {Map}, {Map facing north},
{Map direction of travel} or
{Perspective}
To open route 125, 141 {Route menu}
To open "New route" 141 {New route}
To change scale 139 {Scale ... miles} or
{Scale ... feet}
To display towns/cities and streets along the
route 139
{Route list}
Function Command
Function Command
To open "Car Data" 69 {Car Data}
To display computer 68 {Onboard info}
To display trip computer 70 {Trip computer}
To open speed limit 79 {Limit}
To open stopwatch 79 {Stopwatch}
To activate road-speed limit 79 {Limit on}
To deactivate road-speed limit 79 {Limit off}
Function Command
Tone control 151 {Audio}
To switch on radio 154 {Radio on},
{FM} or
{AM}
To open "FM" 154 {FM menu}
To open "AM" 154 {AM menu}
To open "All stations" 154 {FM All stations}
To select radio station 154 {Station} e.g. {Station WNYC} or
{Choose station}
To open "Presets" 154 {FM presets} or
{AM presets}
To open "Manual" 155 {FM manual} or
{AM manual} or
{Choose frequency},
{Frequency ... Megahertz}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice command system
242
Climate
menu
To select preset radio station 156 {Preset ...}
e.g. {Preset 1}
To open strongest radio stations 155 {AM Autostore}
To open "SAT" 161 {SAT radio menu}
To switch on satellite radio 161 {SAT radio}
To open "Presets" of the satellite radio 162 {SAT radio presets}
To open "All channels" of the satellite radio 161 {SAT radio all channels}
To open "Categories" of the satellite radio 161 {SAT radio categories}
To open CD player 163 {CD menu}
To switch on CD player 163 {CD}
To open CD changer 163 {CD changer menu}
To switch on CD changer 163 {CD changer}
To select a CD in the CD changer 163 {CD 1...6}
To select track 164 {CD track ...}
To select a CD and track in the CD changer 164 {CD 1...6 track ...}
To select track 164 {Track ...}
To start sound output for external audio
device 169
{Audio Aux on}
Function Command
Function Command
To open "Vent settings" 98 {Vent settings}
To open "Automatic programs" 99 {Automatic programs}
Function Command
To open the menu {Settings menu}
To open "Info sources" {Info sources}
To open "Settings" {Settings}
To open "Door locks" 29, 32 {Door locks}
To open "Steering wheel buttons" 53 {Steering wheel buttons}
To open "Lighting" 63, 93 {Lighting}
To open "BMW Service" 192 {BMW Service}
To open "Service requirements" 73 {Service requirements}
To open "Service" 72 {Service}
To display "Check Control messages" 78 {Check Control messages}
To set brightness of Control Display 80 {Brightness}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Reference
243
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
To open "Units" 71 {Units}
To open "Language" 80, 140 {Languages}
To open "Time" 75 {Time}
To open "Date" 76 {Date}
To open "PDC" 81 {PDC}
To open "FTM" 84 {FTM}
Function Command
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
244
Everything from A-Z
Index
"..." Identifies Control Display
texts used to select
individual functions and
refers you to the page where
these texts can be found.
A
ABS Antilock Brake
System 82
Accessories, refer to The
individual vehicle 5
Accident, reporting, refer to
Emergency Request 229
Activated-charcoal filter 101
"Activation time" for parked
car ventilation 101
Active steering 88
Adaptive Head Light 94
"Add digits" on the mobile
phone 184
Additives
– coolant 216
– engine oil 215
"Address book" in
navigation 131
Address for navigation
– deleting 133
– entering 123, 131
– selecting 132
– storing 131
– storing current position 132
"Add to destination list" 126
Airbags 89
– sitting safely 45
– warning lamp 90
Air conditioner 97
Air distribution
– automatic 99
Air flow rate 99
Airing, refer to Ventilation 100
Air outlets, refer to Air
vents 97
Air pressure, checking, refer
to Tire inflation
pressure 204
Air recirculation, refer to
Recirculated-air mode 99
"Air recirculation on / off" 53
Air vents 97
AKI, refer to Fuel
specifications 202
Alarm system 34
– avoiding unintentional
alarms 35
– interior motion sensor 35
– switching off an alarm 35
– tilt alarm sensor 35
"All channels" for satellite
radio 161
All-season tires, refer to
Winter tires 211
"All stations", displaying with
the radio 154
"AM", waveband 150, 154
Ambient air, refer to
Recirculated-air mode
99
Antenna for mobile phone 176
Antifreeze
– coolant 216
– washer fluid 64
Antilock Brake System
ABS 82
Anti-theft alarm system, refer
to Alarm system 34
Anti-theft system 29
Approved axle loads, refer to
Weights 239
Approved gross vehicle
weight, refer to Weights 239
Armrest, refer to Center
armrest 107
Arrival time
– computer 69
Arrival time, refer to Starting
destination guidance 136
Arrow display for
navigation 137
"Arrow display" in
navigation 137
Ashtray 107
Assist 191
Assistance systems, refer to
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 82
"Assist profile" 197
AUC Automatic recirculated-
air control 99
"Audio" 153, 157
Audio 150
– controls 150
– switching on/off 150
– tone control 151
– volume 151
"Audio", refer to Tone
control 151
Automatic
– air distribution 99
– air flow rate 99
– BMW Teleservice Call 193
– cruise control 65
– headlamp control 92
– storing of stations 155
Automatic car wash, refer to
Car wash 116
Automatic car washes 219
Automatic climate control 97
– automatic air distribution 99
– settings via iDrive 98
Automatic curb monitor 52
Automatic lamps
– refer to Welcome lamps 92
"Automatic programs" with
automatic climate control 99
Automatic recirculated-air
control AUC 99
Automatic station search 155
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Reference
245
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 60
– interlock 61
– selector lever lock 61
– shiftlock 61
– towing 231
– tow-starting 231
"Automatic ventilation" for
parked car ventilation 101
AUTO program for automatic
climate control 99
"Auto Request" 193
"Autostore"
– on the radio 156
"AUX" 150, 169, 171
– AUX-In port 169
– USB-audio interface 170
AUX-In port 169
Average fuel consumption 69
– setting the units 71
Average speed 69
"Avoid ferries" in
navigation 134
"Avoid highways" in
navigation 134
Avoid highways in
navigation 134
Avoiding unintentional
alarms 35
"Avoid tollroads" in
navigation 134
Axle loads, refer to
Weights 239
"A - Z" 183, 184
B
Backrests, refer to Seats 46
Backrest width adjustment 47
Back seats, refer to Rear seats
– adjusting head restraints 48
Backup lamp, replacing
bulb 226
Bag for skis, refer to Ski
bag 109
Balance, tone control 151
Band-aids, refer to First-aid
pouch 230
Bar, refer to Tow-starting,
towing away 232
Bass, tone control 151
Bass sounds, refer to Treble
and bass 151
Battery 227
– charging 227
– disposal 37, 227
– jump starting 230
– temporary power failure 227
Battery renewal
– remote control for vehicle 37
Being towed 231
Belts, refer to Safety belts 51
Belt tensioner, refer to Safety
belts 51
Beverage holders, refer to
Cup holders 107
Blower, refer to Air flow
rate 99
BMW
– car shampoo 222
"BMW
Assist" 192, 193, 194, 195
BMW Assist
– activating 196
– concierge service 195
– contacting BMW Customer
Relations 194
– Roadside Assistance 192
– services offered 191
– TeleServices 193
"BMW Contact" 186
"BMW Contact
Numbers" 186
BMW Maintenance
System 217
"BMW Service settings" 197
BMW Teleservice Call
– automatic 193
– manual 193
BMW TeleServices 193
– displaying 194
– updating 194
Bottle holders, refer to Cup
holders 107
Brake assist, refer to Dynamic
Brake Control 82
Brake fluid
– service requirements 72
Brake Force Display 88
Brake lamps
– Brake Force Display 88
– replacing bulb 226
Brake pads, breaking in 114
Brake rotors 116
– brakes 114
– breaking in 114
Brakes
– ABS 82
– BMW Maintenance
System 217
– braking safely 116
– breaking in 114
– parking brake 59
– service requirements 72
Brake system 114
– BMW Maintenance
System 217
– breaking in 114
– disc brakes 116
Breakdown services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 229
Breaking in the clutch 114
Break-in period 114
"Brightness" 80
Bulb changing, refer to Lamps
and bulbs 223
Bulbs, changing 223
Button for starting the
engine 58
Buttons on the steering
wheel 11
C
California Proposition 65
warning 6
"Call" 184, 195
Call
– accepting 182
– displaying accepted 184
– ending 183
– missed 184
– starting 183
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
246
Calling
– from phone book 183
– from Top 8 list 184
– redialing 184
Can holders, refer to Cup
holders 107
Capacities 239
Capacity of the cargo bay 239
Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 227
Car care, refer to Care 219
"Car Data" 69
Care 219
– automatic car washes 219
– care products 219
– carpets 221
– CD/DVD drives 222
– chrome parts 221
– convertible top 220
– displays 222
– exterior 219
– fine wood parts 222
– headlamps 220
– high-pressure washer 219
– interior 221
– leather 221
– light-alloy wheels 221
– paintwork 220
– plastic parts 222
– rubber seals 221
– safety belts 222
– sensors and cameras 222
– upholstery and cloth
trim 221
– washing the car
manually 220
– windows 220
– wiper blades 220
Cargo, securing 118
Cargo bay
– capacity 239
– convenient access 37
– enlarging, refer to Through-
loading system 108
– lamp, refer to Interior
lamps 95
– lid, refer to Luggage
compartment lid 33
– opening from outside 33
Cargo bay lid, refer to
Luggage compartment
lid 33
Cargo bay net, refer to
Securing cargo 118
Cargo loading
– securing cargo 118
– stowing cargo 117
– vehicle 117
Car jack
– jacking points 227
Car key, refer to Integrated
key/remote control 28
Car phone 176
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 107
– refer to Mobile phone 176
– refer to separate Owner's
Manual
Car radio, refer to Radio 154
Car shampoo 222
Car wash 116
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 115
"Categories" for satellite
radio 161
"CD" 150, 163
CD changer 163
– compressed audio files 163
– controls 150
– fast forward/reverse 167
– installation location 167
– playing a track 165
– random order 166
– repeating a track 166
– selecting a CD 163
– selecting a track 164
– switching on/off 150
– tone control 151
– volume 151
CD player 163
– compressed audio files 163
– controls 150
– fast forward/reverse 167
– playing a track 165
– random order 166
– repeating a track 166
– selecting a track 164
– switching on/off 150
– tone control 151
– volume 151
Center armrest 107
Center brake lamp, replacing
bulb 226
Center console, refer to
Around the center
console 14
Central key, refer to Integrated
key/remote control 28
"Central locking" 30, 50
Central locking
– from inside 32
– from outside
29
Central locking system 29
– convenient access 36
Changes, technical, refer to
For your own safety 5
Changing the language on the
Control Display 80
Changing wheels 226
Chassis number, refer to
Engine compartment 213
Check Control 77
"Check Control
messages" 78
Checking oil level 213
Child-restraint fixing system
LATCH 56
Child-restraint systems 55
Child seats 55
Chrome parts 222
Chrome polish 222
Cigarette lighter 108
Cleaning headlamps 64
– washer fluid 64
Cleaning your BMW, refer to
Care 219
"Climate" 98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Reference
247
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Clock 67
– 12h/24h format 76
– setting time 75
Closing
– from inside 32
– from outside 29
Clothes hooks 107
Cold start, refer to Starting the
engine 59
Combination instrument, refer
to Instrument cluster 12
Comfort access, refer to
Convenient access 36
Comfort area, refer to Around
the center console 14
"Communication" 182, 192, 1
93, 194, 195
Compact disc, refer to
– CD changer 163
– CD player 163
Compartment for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 58
Compass 105
Computer 68
– displays on Control
Display 69
– hour signal 76
Computer, refer to iDrive 16
"Concert hall" for Tone
control 152
"Concierge" 195
Concierge service 195
Condensation, refer to When
the vehicle is parked 116
Condition Based Service
CBS 217
Configuring settings, refer to
Personal Profile 28
Confirmation signals for
locking/unlocking the
vehicle 31
Connecting vacuum cleaner,
refer to Connecting
electrical appliances 108
Consumption, refer to
Average fuel
consumption 69
"Continue guidance to
destination?" 137
Control Center, refer to
iDrive 16
Control Display 16
Controller, refer to iDrive 16
Controls and displays 10
Convenient access 36
– replacing the battery 37
Convenient operation
– windows 30
– windows with convenient
access 36
– with convenient access 36
Convenient starting, refer to
Starting the engine 59
Convertible
– rollover protection
system 90
– top 40
– wind deflector 44
Convertible top
– convenient opening 30
Convertible top care 220
Coolant 216
– checking level 216
– filling 216
Coolant temperature 68
Cooling, maximum 98
Cooling fluid, refer to
Coolant 216
Copyright 2
Corner-illuminating lamps 94
Corner-illuminating lamps,
refer to Adaptive Head
Light 94
Cornering lamps, refer to
Adaptive Head Light 94
Courtesy lamps 95
Cross-hairs in navigation 128
Cruise control 65
Cruising range 69
Cup holders 107
Curb weight, refer to
Weights 239
Current fuel consumption 69
"Current position" 144
Current position
– displaying 144
– entering 132
– storing 132
"Customer
Relations" 186, 194
D
Dashboard, refer to
Cockpit 10
Dashboard lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 95
Data
– dimensions 237
– sizes 237
Data, technical 236
– capacities 239
– engine 236
– weights 239
"Date" 76
Date
– setting 76
– setting format 77
"Date format" 77
"Daytime running lamps" 94
Daytime running lamps,
switch positions 93
DBC Dynamic Brake
Control 82
"Deactivated" 51
Deactivating front passenger
airbags 89
Deadlocking, refer to
Locking 30
Decommissioning the vehicle,
refer to Caring for your
vehicle
Defect
– door lock 32
– fuel filler door 202
– glass roof 40
– luggage compartment lid 33
Defogging windows 100
Defrosting the windows 100
Defrosting windshield, refer to
Defrosting windows 100
Defrost position, refer to
Defrosting windows 100
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
248
"Delete address book" in
navigation 133
"Delete all numbers" on the
mobile phone 185
"Delete data" in
navigation 133
"Delete" for mobile
phone 185
Destination address
– deleting 133
– entering 123, 127
Destination for navigation
– destination list 130
– entry 123
– home address 133
– manual entry 123, 127
– selecting from address
book 132
– selecting using
information 129
– selecting via language 127
– selecting via map 128
– storing 131
Destination guidance 136
– canceling voice
instructions 54
– changing specified
route 134
– displaying route 137
– distance and arrival 136
– starting 136
– terminating/continuing 136
– voice instructions 140
– volume of voice
instructions 140
Destination list for navigation
system 130
Destinations recently driven
to 130
"Details" for audio mode 171
"Dial" for mobile phone 183
"Dial number" 183
Differential, breaking in 114
Digital clock 67
Digital compass 105
Digital radio, refer to High
Definition Radio 157
Digital Versatile Disc, refer to
– Drive for navigation DVD 150
Dimensions 237
Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 62
Direction instructions, refer to
Voice instructions 140
Directory for navigation, refer
to Address book 131
Displacement, refer to Engine
data
236
"Display" 20
Display, refer to Control
Display 16
Display lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 95
Displays, refer to Instrument
cluster 12
Displays and controls 10
"Display settings" 80
Disposal
– of coolant 216
– remote control battery 37
– vehicle battery 227
Distance, refer to
Computer 69
Distance remaining to service,
refer to Service
requirements 72
"Distance to dest." 70
Distance to destination, refer
to Computer 69
Distance warning, refer to
Park Distance Control
PDC 81
Door key, refer to Integrated
key/remote control 28
Door lock 32
Door lock, confirmation
signals 31
"Door locks" 30, 32, 73
Doors, emergency
operation 32
DOT Quality Grades 208
Draft-free ventilation 100
Drinks holders, refer to Cup
holders 107
Drive for navigation DVD 150
Drive-off assistance, refer to
DSC 82
Drive-off assistant 83
Driving around a traffic
congestion 144
Driving lamps, refer to Parking
lamps/low beams 92
Driving notes 114
Driving off on hills, refer to
Drive-off assistant 83
Driving route, refer to
Displaying route 137
Driving stability control
systems 82
Driving through water 116
Driving tips, refer to Driving
notes 114
Dry air, refer to Cooling
function 100
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 82
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control 83
– indicator lamps 83
DVD
– drive for navigation DVD 150
DVD for navigation 122
Dynamic Brake Control
DBC 82
"Dynamic route" in
navigation 134
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 82
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC
– indicator lamps 83
E
EBV Electronic brake-force
distribution 82
Eject button, refer to Buttons
on the CD player 150
Electrical malfunction
– door lock 32
– fuel filler door 202
– glass roof 40
– luggage compartment lid 33
Electronic brake-force
distribution EBV 82
Electronic oil level check 213
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Reference
249
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC 82
Emergency operation, refer to
Manual operation
– door lock 32
– fuel filler door 202
– glass roof 40
– transmission lock, automatic
transmission 62
Emergency release, luggage
compartment lid 34
Emergency Request 229
Emergency services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 229
"Enabled services" 196
"Enabled TeleServices" 194
"End call" 183
Energy, saving
– saving fuel 114
Engine
– breaking in 114
– data 236
– speed 236
– starting 59
– starting, convenient
access 36
– switching off 59
Engine compartment 213
Engine coolant, refer to
Coolant 216
Engine oil
– adding 215
– additives 215
– BMW Maintenance
System 217
– checking level 213
– intervals between changes,
refer to Service
requirements 72
– specified engine oils 215
"Engine oil level" 214
Engine output, refer to Engine
data 236
Engine speed, refer to Engine
data 236
Engine starting, refer to
Starting the engine 59
"Enter address" 124
Entering a destination 124
Entering a destination
country 124
Entering a house number or
intersection 126
Entering an intersection 125
Entering a street 125
"Entertainment" 150
"Equalizer", refer to Tone
control 152
Equalizer, refer to Tone
control 152
"ESN" 160
ESP Electronic Stability
Program, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC 82
Event data recorders 218
Exhaust system, refer to Hot
exhaust system 115
Exterior mirrors 51
– adjusting 51
– automatic dimming
feature 53
– automatic heating 52
– folding in and out 52
External audio device, refer to
AUX-In port 169
Eyes
– for tow-starting and towing
away 231
– for tying down loads 118
F
Fader, tone control 151
Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 77
Failure of an electrical
consumer 227
False alarm, refer to Avoiding
unintentional alarms 35
Fastening safety belts, refer to
Safety belts 51
Fastest route for
navigation 134
Fast forward
– CD changer 167
– CD player 167
"Fast route" in navigation 134
Filter of automatic climate
control, refer to Microfilter/
activated charcoal filter 101
First aid pouch 230
Fixture for remote control,
refer to Ignition lock 58
Flash when locking/
unlocking 31
Flat tire
– Run-Flat Tires 210
– Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 85
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 84
– indicating a flat tire 85
– initializing the system 84
– malfunction 85
– system limits 84
Flat tires, refer to Tire
condition 209
"FM", waveband 150, 154
FM, waveband 154
Fog lamps 95
– indicator lamp 13, 95
Footbrake, refer to Braking
safely 116
Footwell lamps 95
For your own safety 5
Frequency, selecting
manually 155
Front airbags 89
Front seat setting 45
Frost, removing from
windows, refer to Defrosting
windows 100
FTM, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 84
Fuel 202
– gauge 68
– high-quality brands 202
– quality 202
– specifications 202
– tank contents, refer to
Capacities 239
Fuel clock, refer to Fuel
gauge 68
Fuel consumption display,
refer to Average fuel
consumption 69
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
250
Fuel consumption statistics,
refer to Average fuel
consumption 69
Fuel display, refer to Fuel
gauge 68
Fuel filler door 202
– releasing in the event of
electrical malfunction 202
Fuses 227
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 103
Gasoline, refer to Required
fuel 202
Gasoline display, refer to Fuel
gauge 68
Gear change
– with automatic
transmission 61
– with manual transmission 60
Gear display, with automatic
transmission 60
Gearshift lever
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 61
– manual transmission 60
General driving notes 115
Glass roof, electric 39
– closing after electrical
malfunction 40
– convenient operation 32
– opening, closing 39
– operation with convenient
access 36
– pinch protection system 40
– raising 39
– remote control 30
Glove compartment 106
GPS navigation, refer to
Navigation system 122
Grills, refer to Air vents 97
Gross vehicle weight, refer to
Weights 239
H
Halogen lamps
– replacing bulbs 224
Handbrake, refer to Parking
brake 59
Hands-free system, refer to
Microphone for hands-free
mode 14
Hazard warning flashers 14
"HD radio" 157
HD radio, refer to High
Definition Radio 157
Head airbags 89
Headlamp control,
automatic 92
Headlamp cover 224
Headlamp flasher 62
– indicator lamp 13
Headlamps
– replacing bulbs 224
Head restraints 47
Heated
– seats 49
Heated mirrors 52
Heating
– mirrors 52
– seats 49
Heating, rear window 100
Heating and ventilation 97
Heating during a stop 100
Heavy loads, refer to Stowing
cargo 117
Height, refer to
Dimensions 237
Height adjustment
– steering wheel 53
High beams 94
– indicator lamp 13
– replacing bulbs 224
High Definition Radio 157
High-pressure
washer 219, 220
High water, refer to Driving
through water 116
Highways, refer to Route
criteria 134
Hills 116
Holders for cups 107
Home address 133
"Home address" in
navigation 134
Hood 212
Hot exhaust system 115
"Hour memo" 76
"House number" in
destination entry 126
Hydraulic brake assist, refer to
Dynamic Brake Control 82
Hydroplaning 115
I
IBOC, refer to High Definition
Radio 157
Ice warning, refer to Outside
temperature
warning 67
ID3 tag, refer to Information
about the track 165
Identification marks
– tire coding 208
iDrive 16
– adjusting brightness 80
– automatic climate control 98
– changing date and time 75
– changing language 80
– confirming selection or
entry 19
– displays, menus 17
– lists 19
– menu guidance 17
– operating principle 16
– selecting a menu item 19
– status information 20
– switching menu pages 19
– symbols 18
Ignition 58
– switched off 58
– switched on 58
Ignition key, refer to
Integrated key/remote
control 28
Ignition key position 1, refer to
Radio readiness 58
Ignition key position 2, refer to
Ignition on 58
Ignition lock 58
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Reference
251
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Imprint 2
Indicator and warning
lamps 13
– Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 87
Indicator lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 95
Individually programmable
buttons on steering
wheel 53
Individual settings, refer to
Personal Profile 28
Inflation pressure, tires 204
Inflation pressure monitoring,
refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor TPM 85
Information
– on another location 129
– on country 129
– on current position 129
– on destination location 129
"Information on
destination" 131
"Info sources" 73
Initializing
– compass, refer to
Calibrating 106
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 84
"Input map" 128
Installation location
– CD changer 167
Instructions for navigation
system, refer to Voice
instructions 140
Instrument cluster 12
Instrument lighting 95
Integrated key 28
Integrated universal remote
control 103
Interesting destination for
navigation 129
"Interim time" 79
Interior lamps 95
– remote control 30
Interior motion sensor 35
Interior rearview mirror 52
– automatic dimming
feature 53
– compass 105
Interlock 61
Intermittent mode of the
wipers 63
J
Jacking points 227
Jets, refer to Air vents 97
Joystick, refer to iDrive 16
Jumpering, refer to Jump
starting 230
Jump starting 230
K
Key, refer to Integrated key/
remote control 28
Keyless go, refer to
Convenient access 36
Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Convenient
access 36
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 28
Kick-down 61
Knock control 202
L
Lamps
– Adaptive Head Light 94
– instrument lighting 95
– interior lighting 95
Lamps, refer to Parking lamps/
low beams 92
Lamps and bulbs, replacing
bulbs 223
"Language / Units" 71, 80
"Language / Units" in
navigation 138, 140
"Languages" 80
"Languages" in
navigation 138, 140
Lashing eyes, refer to
Securing cargo 118
Last destinations, refer to
Destination list 130
"Last seat pos." 50
LATCH child-restraint fixing
system 56
Leather care 221
LED Light-emitting
diodes 223
Length, refer to
Dimensions 237
License plate lamp, replacing
bulb 226
Light-alloy wheels 221
Light-emitting diodes
LED 223
Lighter 108
– socket 108
"Lighting" 63, 93
Lighting
– lamps and bulbs 223
– of instruments 95
– of vehicle, refer to Lamps 92
Light switch 92
"Limit", refer to Speed limit 79
Limit, refer to Speed limit 79
Load securing equipment,
refer to Securing cargo 118
Lock buttons of doors, refer to
Locking 33
Locking
– adjusting confirmation
signal 31
– from inside 33
– from outside 30
– without remote control, refer
to Convenient access 36
Locking and unlocking doors
– from inside 32
– from outside 29
Low-beam headlamps 92
– automatic 92
– replacing bulbs 224
Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 47
Luggage compartment, refer
to Cargo bay
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
252
Luggage compartment lid 33
– convenient access 37
– emergency release 34
– opening from outside 33
– unlocking manually 33
– unlocking with remote
control 30
Luggage rack, refer to Roof-
mounted luggage rack 118
Lumbar support 47
M
M+S tires, refer to Winter
tires 211
Maintenance, refer to
– BMW Maintenance
System 217
– Service booklet
Maintenance system 217
Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 77
Manual
– BMW Teleservice Call 193
Manual car wash 220
"Manual" on the radio 155
Manual operation
– door lock 32
– fuel filler door 202
– glass roof 40
– luggage compartment lid 33
– transmission lock, automatic
transmission 62
Manual operation with
automatic transmission 61
Manual transmission 60
Map
– changing scale 139
– destination entry 128
"Map direction of travel" 138
"Map facing north" 138
Maximum cooling 98
Maximum speed
– for winter tires 211
Menus, refer to iDrive 16
Message list, traffic
information 142
Microfilter/activated-charcoal
filter for automatic climate
control 101
Microphone for telephone 14
Mirror dimming feature 53
Mirrors 51
– automatic curb monitor 52
– exterior mirrors 51
– heating 52
– interior rearview mirror 52
"Missed calls" 184
Missed calls 184
Mobile phone
– accepted calls 184
– adjusting volume 181
– calling 183
– ending call 183
– missed calls 184
– operation via iDrive 181
– redialing 184
– Top 8 184
– touch tone dialing 186
Mobile phone, installation
location, refer to Center
armrest 107
Mobile phone, refer to the
separate Owner's Manual
Modifications, technical, refer
to For your own safety 5
Monitor, refer to iDrive 16
Monitoring system for tire
pressures, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 84
"Monitor on / off" 54
Most recent mobile phone
numbers 184
MP3, refer to Compressed
audio files 163
Multifunctional steering
wheel, refer to Buttons on
the steering wheel 11
Multifunction switch
– refer to Turn signals/
headlamp flasher 62
– refer to Wiper system 63
Music tracks, refer to
Tracks 164
"Mute on / off" 54
N
"Navigation" 123, 129
Navigation announcements,
refer to Switching voice
instructions on/off 140
Navigation drive, location 122
Navigation DVD 122
– drive 150
Navigation system 122
– address book 131
– changing a route 141
– destination entry 123
– destination list 130
– displaying current
position 144
– entering a destination
manually 123, 127
– last destinations 130
– navigation DVD 122
– opening 123
– route display 137
– route list 139
– searching for a special
destination 129
– selecting destination using
information 129
– selecting destination via
map 128
– selecting route criteria 134
– starting destination
guidance 136
– switching off, refer to
Terminating/continuing
destination guidance 136
– terminating/continuing
destination guidance 136
– voice instructions 140
– volume adjustment 140
"Navigation voice
instructions" 139
"Navigation voice
instructions" via buttons on
steering wheel 53
Neck support, refer to Head
restraints 47
Nets, refer to Storage
compartments 107
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Reference
253
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
"New address" in
navigation 132
"New destination" 124, 128
"New route" 141
New tires 210
"Next entertainment
source" 54
North-facing map 138
Number of cylinders, refer to
Engine data 236
O
OBD socket, refer to Socket
for On-Board Diagnosis 218
Octane ratings, refer to Fuel
specifications 202
Odometer 67
Oil, refer to Engine oil 213
Oil consumption 213
Oil level 213
Old batteries, refer to
Disposal 227
"On a new destination" in
navigation 130
"Onboard info" 69
Onboard tool kit 223
"On destination" 130
"On location" 130
Opening and closing
– convenient access 36
– from inside 32
– from outside 29
– using the door lock 32
– via the remote control 29
Operation by voice for mobile
phone 187
– adjusting volume 188
– canceling 187
– correcting phone
number 188
– dialing phone number 188
– placing a call 188
– redialing 188
– voice commands 187
– voice phone book 188
"Options" 195, 196
Orientation menu, refer to
Start menu 17
Outlets, refer to
Ventilation 100
Output, refer to Engine
data 236
Outside temperature
display 67
– changing unit of measure 71
– on computer 71
Outside temperature
warning 67
Overriding selector lever
lock 62
P
Paintwork care 220
Park assistant, refer to Park
Distance Control 81
Park Distance Control PDC 81
"Parked car operation" 101
"Parked car ventilation" 101
Parked car ventilation 101
– activating switch-on
time 102
– preselecting switch-on
times 101
– switching on and off
directly 101
Parking
– vehicle 59
Parking aid, refer to Park
Distance Control PDC 81
Parking brake 59
– indicator lamp 60
Parking lamps/low beams 92
– replacing bulbs 224
Parts and accessories, refer to
The individual vehicle 5
Passenger-side mirror tilt
function 52
"Pathway lighting" 93
Pathway lighting 93
"PDC" 81
Personal Profile 28
"Perspective" 138
Phone book 181
Phone numbers
– deleting from phone
book 185
– dialing 183
– most recent numbers 184
– selecting in phone book 184
– Top 8 184
Pinch protection system
– glass roof, electric 40
– windows 39
Placing a call, refer to
telephone owner's manual
"Play" for satellite radio 161
Polish 222
Pollen, refer to Microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter 101
Position
– displaying 144
– saving, refer to Storing
current position 132
Power windows 38
Power windows, refer to
Windows 38
"Presets", displaying with the
radio 154
"Presets" for satellite
radio 161
Pressure, tires 204
Pressure monitoring of tires,
refer to Flat Tire Monitor 84
Pressure monitoring of tires,
refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor TPM 85
Programmable buttons on the
steering wheel 11
Programmable memory
keys 21
Protection function, refer to
Pinch protection system
– glass roof, electric 40
– windows 39
Providing medical assistance,
refer to First add pouch 230
Puncture
– Flat Tire Monitor 84
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
254
R
Radio
– autostore 155
– controls 150
– High Definition Radio 157
– listening to stations 154
– sampling stations 155
– satellite radio 160
– selecting a
waveband 150, 154
– selecting the frequency
manually 155
– station search 155
– stations with best
reception 155
– storing stations 156
– switching on/off 150
– tone control 151
– volume 151
Radio position, refer to Radio
readiness 58
Radio readiness 58
– switched off 58
– switched on 58
Rain sensor 63
"Random", refer to Random
play 166
"Random all" for audio
mode 167
"Random directory" for audio
mode 167
Random play 166
"RDS" Radio Data
System 157
Reading lamps 96
Rear fog lamps
– replacing bulb 226
Rear lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 225
Rear-mounted luggage
rack 119
Rear seats
– adjusting head restraints 48
– folding down backrests 108
Rearview mirror, refer to
Mirrors 51
Rear window defroster 100
"Received calls" 184
Receiving level of mobile
phone, refer to Status
information 20
Recirculated-air mode 99
Recirculation of air, refer to
Recirculated-air mode 99
Recording times, refer to
Stopwatch 79
"Redial" on the mobile
phone 184
Reflectors, refer to Tail
lamps 225
Refueling 202
Releasing
– hood 212
Remaining distance, refer to
Computer 69
Remaining distance, refer to
Cruising range 69
Remote control 28
– battery renewal 37
– convenient access 36
– garage door opener 103
– luggage compartment lid 30
– malfunctions 31, 37
– removing from the ignition
lock 58
– service data 217
Remote control key, refer to
Integrated key/remote
control 28
"Repeat directory" for audio
mode 166
"Repeat" for audio mode 166
"Repeat track" for audio
mode 166
Replacement fuses, refer to
Fuses 227
Replacement remote
control 28
Replacing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 223
Replacing tires, refer to New
wheels and tires 210
Reporting safety defects 6
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 68
Reservoir for washer
systems 64
"Reset" 84, 86
– tone settings 153
Reset, refer to Resetting tone
settings 152
"Reset" for stopwatch 79
Residual heat 100
Restraint systems, refer to
Safety belts 51
Restraint systems for
children 55
Retreaded tires 210
Reverse
– CD changer 167
– CD player 167
Reverse gear
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 61
– manual transmission 60
Road map 138
"Roadside Assistance" 192
Roadside
Assistance 192, 229
Roadside parking lamps 94
– replacing bulbs 224
Roadworthiness test, refer to
Service requirements 72
Rollover protection system,
convertible 90
– resetting 91
Roof load capacity 239
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 118
Rope, refer to Tow-starting,
towing away 232
Rotary/pushbutton control,
refer to Controller 16
Route 134
– arrow display 137
– changing 141
– display 137
– displaying streets and
towns/cities 139
– displaying town 139
– list 139
– map display 138
– selecting 134
– selecting criteria 134
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Reference
255
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
RSC Runflat System
Component, refer to Run-
Flat Tires 210
Runflat System Component
RSC, refer to Run-Flat
Tires 210
Run-Flat Tires 210
– continuing driving with a
damaged tire 85
– flat tire 85
– new tires 210
– remaining driving distance,
refer to Indication of a flat
tire 85
– tire inflation pressure 204
– winter tires 211
Runflat Tyres, refer to Run-
Flat Tires 210
S
Safety-belt height
adjustment 51
Safety belts 51
– damage 51
– indicator lamp 51
– reminder 51
– sitting safely 45
Safety systems
– airbags 89
– Antilock Brake System
ABS 82
– Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 82
– rollover protection system,
convertible 90
– safety belts 51
Safety tires, refer to Run-Flat
Tires 210
"SAT" 150, 160
Satellite radio 160
– displaying additional
information 161
– enabling 160
– selecting channel 161
– storing channel 161
Saving fuel 114
"Scan"
– sampling radio stations 155
– sampling tracks on CD 165
Scan
– CD changer 165
– CD player 165
– radio 155
"Scan all" for audio mode 165
"Scan directory" for audio
mode 165
Screen, refer to iDrive 16
Screw thread for tow
fitting 231
SDARS, refer to Satellite
radio 160
Seat and mirror memory 49
Seat belt reminder, refer to
'Fasten safety belts'
reminder 51
Seats 45
– heating 49
– sitting safely 45
Securing cargo 110, 111
"Select as
destination" 130, 195
"Select current speed" 79
Selecting a country for
navigation 124
Selecting an audio source 150
Selecting menu items 19
Selecting new scale for
navigation 139
Selector lever, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 61
"Service" 214
Service, refer to Roadside
Assistance 229
Service car, refer to Roadside
Assistance 229
Service data in remote
control 217
"Service Info" 73, 193
Service Interval Display, refer
to Condition Based Service
CBS 217
"Service Request" 186, 193
Service requirement display,
refer to Condition Based
Service CBS 217
"Service
requirements" 73, 193, 214
Service requirements 72
"Set date" 76
"Set time" 76
"Settings" 197
Settings
– clock, 12h/24h format 76
– date format 77
"Settings" for unlocking 30
Setting times, refer to
Preselecting switch-on
times 101
Shifting gears with automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 61
Shiftlock, refer to Changing
selector lever positions 61
Short commands for the voice
command system 240
Shortest route in navigation,
refer to Selecting route 134
"Short route" in
navigation 134
"Show current position" 129
"Show destination
position" 129
Shuffled, refer to Random
– CD changer 166
– CD player 166
Side airbags 89
Side windows, refer to
Windows 38
Signal horn, refer to Horn 10
Sitting safely 45
– airbags 45
– safety belt 45
Ski bag 109
Sliding/tilt sunroof, refer to
Glass roof, electric 39
Slot for remote control 58
Smokers' package, refer to
Ashtray 107, 108
Snap-in adapter 189
Snap-in adapter, refer to
Center armrest 107
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
256
Snow chains 211
Socket, refer to Connecting
electrical appliances 108
Socket for On-Board
Diagnosis OBD 218
Song search, refer to Playing a
track 165
Sound, adjusting during audio
playback, refer to Tone
control 151
Sound output for
entertainment on/off 150
Spare fuses 227
Speaking, refer to Voice
instructions from navigation
system 140
Special oils, refer to Specified
engine oils 215
Specified engine oils 215
Speed
– for winter tires 211
Speed-dependent volume
control 151
Speed display, refer to
Speedometer 12
Speed limit 79
Speed limit warning, refer to
Speed limit 79
Speedometer 12
"Speed volume", refer to Tone
control 152
Sport program, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 61
Spray nozzles, refer to
Windshield washer
nozzles 64
Stability control,
refer to Driving stability
control systems 82
Start/stop button 58
– starting the engine 59
– switching off the engine 59
"Start guidance" 126
Starting, refer to Starting the
engine 59
Starting assistance, refer to
Jump starting 230
Starting the engine
– start/stop button 58
Start menu 17
"Start service" 192
"Start service" for BMW
Assist 195
"State / Province" in
destination entry 124
Station
– refer to Radio 154
"Status" 73
Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing 5
Steam jet 219, 220
Steering wheel 53
– adjustment 53
– buttons on steering
wheel 11
– freely programmable
buttons 53
"Steering wheel buttons" 53
Steering with variable ratio,
refer to Active steering 88
Steptronic, refer to Automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 60
"Stopwatch" 79
Stopwatch 79
Storage 222
Storage compartment
package 107
Storage compartments 107
"Store" for satellite radio 162
"Store in address book" in
navigation 132
"Store" on the radio 156
Storing
– seat position, refer to Seat
and mirror memory 49
– telephone numbers, refer to
separate Owner's Manual
Storing current position 132
Storing radio stations 156
Storing tires 211
Stowage, refer to Storage
compartments 107
"Street" in destination
entry 126
Summer tires, refer to Wheels
and tires 204
"Surround Settings", refer to
Tone control 152
Switches, refer to Cockpit 10
Switching off
– engine 59
Switching off the engine
– start/stop button 58
Switching on
– audio 150
– CD changer 150
– CD player 150
– radio 150
Switching on the hour
signal 76
Switching the cooling function
on and off 100
Switch-on times of parked car
ventilation, preselecting 101
Symbols 4
– navigation system 143
– status information 20
– traffic info for navigation
system 141
T
Tachometer 67
Tail lamp, refer to Tail
lamps 225
– replacing bulb 226
Tail lamps 225
– replacing bulb 226
Tank contents, refer to
Capacities 239
Technical changes 5
Technical data 236
Telematics, refer to BMW
TeleServices, BMW
Assist 191
Telephone, installation
location, refer to Center
armrest 107
Telephone, refer to Mobile
phone 176
Telephone, refer to separate
Owner's Manual
"Telephone list" 54
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Reference
257
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Temperature, setting for
automatic climate control 98
Temperature display
– outside temperature 67
– outside temperature
warning 67
– setting the units 71
Tempomat, refer to Cruise
control 65
"Text language", refer to
Language of Control
Display 80
"Theater" for Tone
control 152
Thigh support 46
Third brake lamp, refer to
Center brake lamp 226
Three-point safety belt 51
Through-loading system 108
Tilt alarm sensor 35
Tilt function, passenger-side
mirror 52
"Time / Date" 75, 76
"Time format" 76
Timer, refer to Preselecting
switch-on times 101
Tire inflation pressure 204
– loss 85, 86
Tire pressure monitoring,
refer to Flat Tire Monitor 84
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 85
– resetting the system 86
– system limitations 85
– warning lamp 87
Tire puncture, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 85
Tire Quality Grading 208
Tires
– age 208, 210
– air loss 87
– breaking in 114
– changing, refer to Changing
wheels 226
– condition 209
– damage 209
– inflation pressure 204
– labels 208
– minimum tread depth 209
– new tires 210
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Flat Tire Monitor 84
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 85
– puncture 85
– retreaded 210
– Run-Flat Tires 210
– size 208
– wear indicators, refer to
Minimum tread depth 209
– winter tires 211
Tires, FTM 84
TMC station, refer to Traffic
information 141
"Tone" 151
Tone in audio mode
– adjusting 151
– middle setting 152
Tools, refer to Onboard tool
kit 223
"Top 8" for mobile phone 184
Torque, refer to Engine
data 236
Touch tone dialing 186
Tow bar 232
Tow fitting 231
Tow fittings for tow-starting
and towing away 231
Towing 231
– car with automatic
transmission 231
– methods 232
Towing and tow-starting 231
Town/city for destination 124
"Town / City" in destination
entry 124
Tow rope 232
Tow-starting 231
"TPM" 86
TPM, refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor 85
Tracks
– random play sequence 166
– sampling, Scan 165
– searching for 165
Traction control, refer to
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 82
Traffic information for
navigation
– calling up 142
– display on route map 143
– during destination
guidance 144
– switching on/off 141
– symbols 143
"Traffic Info settings" 142
Traffic jam
– displaying traffic
information 141
– driving around 144
Transmission
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 60
– manual transmission 60
Transporting children
safely 55
Transport securing devices,
refer to Securing cargo
118
Tread depth, refer to Minimum
tire tread 209
Treble, refer to Treble and
bass 151
Treble, tone control 151
"Trip computer" 70
Trip computer 70
Trip-distance counter, refer to
Trip odometer 67
"Triple turn signal" 63
Triple turn signal activation 63
Trip odometer 67
Trunk, refer to Cargo bay
Trunk lid, refer to Luggage
compartment lid 33
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
258
Turn, indicating
– triple turn signal 63
Turning circle, refer to
Dimensions 237
Turn signals 62
– indicator lamp 12
– replacing bulbs 225
Tying down loads, refer to
Cargo loading 118
U
Underbody protection, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/
UTQR 208
"Units" 71
Units of measure
– average fuel
consumption 71
– temperature 71
Universal garage door opener,
refer to Integrated universal
remote control 103
Universal remote control 103
Unlatching, refer to
Unlocking 29
"Unlock button" 30
Unlocking
– from inside 33
– from outside 29
– luggage compartment lid 37
– without remote control, refer
to Convenient access 36
Unlocking without a key, refer
to Convenient access 36
"Update services" 194, 196
USB-audio interface 170
"USB" for audio
mode 169, 171
V
Vehicle
– battery 227
– breaking in 114
– cargo loading 117
– decommissioning, refer to
Vehicle storage
– dimensions 237
– Identification Number, refer
to Engine compartment 213
– parking 59
– weight 239
"Vehicle / Tires" for
unlocking 30
Vehicle jack 227
Vehicle position, refer to
Displaying current
position 144
Vehicle storage 222
Ventilation 100
– draft-free 100
Ventilation when parked, refer
to Parked car ventilation 101
Vents, refer to Ventilation 100
"Vent settings" 98
Voice commands
– overview 23
– short commands 240
Voice instructions from
navigation system 140
– muting 54, 140
– repeating 54, 140
– switching on/off 54, 140
– volume 140
Voice phone book 188
Volume 150
– audio sources 150
– fuel tank, refer to
Capacities 239
– mobile phone 181
– speed-dependent
control 151
– voice instructions 140
Volume distribution
– front/rear 151
– left/right 151
W
Warning and indicator
lamps 13
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 77
Warning triangle 230
Washer fluid 64
– content of the reservoir 64
Washer fluid filler neck 64
Waste tray, refer to
Ashtray 107
Water on roads, refer to
Driving through water 116
Water penetration 219, 220
Waveband with the radio 154
Wear indicators in tires, refer
to Minimum tread depth 209
Weights 239
Welcome lamps 92
Wheelbase, refer to
Dimensions 237
Wheels, new 210
Wheels and tires 204
Width, refer to
Dimensions 237
Windows 38
– convenient operation 30
– convenient operation with
convenient access 36
– opening, closing 38
– pinch protection system 39
Windows, defrosting and
removing condensation 100
Windshield
– cleaning 64
– defrosting and removing
condensation 100
Windshield wash
– filling capacity, reservoir 239
Windshield washer reservoir,
refer to Washer fluid filler
neck 64
Windshield washer system 63
– washer fluid 64
– washer nozzles 64
Windshield wiper blades,
changing 223
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Reference
259
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Windshield wipers, refer to
Wiper system 63
Winter tires 211
– setting speed limit 79
– storage 211
Wiper blade replacement 223
Wiper system 63
"With highways" in
navigation 134
Word-matching principle for
navigation 135
Wrench/screwdriver, refer to
Onboard tool kit 223
X
Xenon lamps
– replacing bulb 223
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
01 41 0 014 954 ue iDrive
*BL001495400X*
The Ultimate
Driving Machine
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 954 - © 02/08 BMW AG
… 21 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels
1

Forum

BMW-1-Serie---2008---128i-Convertible

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw BMW 1 Serie - 2008 - 128i Convertible bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van BMW 1 Serie - 2008 - 128i Convertible in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 9,1 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info